Samsung A200 P200m_fr User Manual To The 101476ed 7265 4608 90d5 29f7c2d50853

User Manual: Samsung A200 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 342 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1
Toshiba Personal Computer
PORTEGE A200 series
Maintenance Manual
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
File Number 960-499
ii PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Copyright
© 2004 by Toshiba Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be
reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Toshiba. No patent liability is assumed, with
respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Toshiba PORTEGE A200series Maintenance Manual
First edition October 2004
Disclaimer
This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The instructions and descriptions it contains are
accurate for the Toshiba PORTEGE A200 series Maintenance Manual at the time of this manual's production.
However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to change without notice. Toshiba assumes no liability
for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or discrepancies between the computer and
the manual.
Trademarks
Intel, Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks and Speed Step is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak.
Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used in this manual.
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Toshiba under license.
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) iii
Preface
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the
Toshiba Personal Computer PORTEGE A200 series.
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate
faulty Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.
Danger: “Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
Warning: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily injury,
if the safety instruction is not observed.
Caution: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.
Note: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance service.
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service
technicians and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety
precautions are adhered to strictly.
? Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. Be sure to use the PH
Point size “0” and “1” screwdrivers complying with the ISO/DIS 8764-1:1996. If a
screw is not fully fastened, it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit,
which could cause overheating, smoke or fire.
? If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model
battery or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong
battery can cause the battery to explode.
iv PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
The manual is divided into the following parts:
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview describes the PORTEGE A200 series system unit
and each FRU.
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve
FRU problems.
Chapter 3 Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic
operations for maintenance service.
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the
FRUs.
Appendices The appendices describe the following:
? Handling the LCD module
? Board layout
? Pin assignments
? Display codes
? Key layout
? Wiring diagrams
? BIOS Rewrite Procedures
? EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures
? Reliability
? Key FD
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) v
Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and
operating procedures.
Acronyms
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in
parentheses following their definition. For example:
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Keys
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on
the keyboard is printed in boldface type.
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such
operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause
(Break) means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If
three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.
User input
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:
DISKCOPY A: B:
The display
Text generated by the PORTEGE A200 that appears on its display is presented in the type
face below:
Format complete
System transferred
vi PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features ......................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Hard Disk Drive.........................................................................................................1-9
1.3 Keyboard..................................................................................................................1-10
1.4 Optical Drive............................................................................................................1-11
1.5 TFT Color Display...................................................................................................1-13
1.6 Power Supply...........................................................................................................1-15
1.7 Batteries ...................................................................................................................1-17
1.8 AC Adapter..............................................................................................................1-20
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.1 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................2-2
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting..................................................................................2-6
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................2-16
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting .....................................................................................2-28
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting .............................................................................................2-31
2.7 Optical Drive Troubleshooting ................................................................................2-36
2.8 Display Troubleshooting..........................................................................................2-37
2.9 Keyboard Troubleshooting ......................................................................................2-39
2.10 Touch Pad Troubleshooting.....................................................................................2-40
2.11 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting.................................................................................2-41
2.12 Modem Troubleshooting..........................................................................................2-42
2.13 LAN Troubleshooting..............................................................................................2-43
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................2-44
2.15 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting...............................................................................2-47
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) vii
Chapter 3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1 The Diagnostic Test...................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test ...................................................................................3-4
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration........................................................................3-8
3.4 Heatrun Test.............................................................................................................3-11
3.5 Subtest Names..........................................................................................................3-12
3.6 System Test..............................................................................................................3-14
3.7 Memory Test............................................................................................................3-16
3.8 Keyboard Test..........................................................................................................3-17
3.9 Display Test .............................................................................................................3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test......................................................................................................3-21
3.11 Printer Test...............................................................................................................3-23
3.12 Async Test................................................................................................................3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test.........................................................................................................3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................3-29
3.15 NDP Test..................................................................................................................3-31
3.16 Expansion Test.........................................................................................................3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test .....................................................................................3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names.........................................................................3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status....................................................................................3-38
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST...................................................................................................3-40
3.21 Head Cleaning..........................................................................................................3-46
3.22 Log Utilities .............................................................................................................3-47
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................3-49
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities......................................................................................3-50
3.25 System Configuration..............................................................................................3-55
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g).........................................................3-57
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)............................................................3-61
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program ..................................................3-65
3.29 Sound Test program.................................................................................................3-79
3.30 SETUP .....................................................................................................................3-85
viii PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Battery pack ..............................................................................................................4-8
4.3 PC card....................................................................................................................4-10
4.4 SD memory card .....................................................................................................4-11
4.5 Connector panel......................................................................................................4-12
4.6 Keyboard.................................................................................................................4-13
4.7 Optical drive............................................................................................................4-16
4.8 Palm rest/Touch pad................................................................................................4-18
4.9 HDD........................................................................................................................4-22
4.10 Memory module ......................................................................................................4-24
4.11 Wireless LAN module ...........................................................................................4-26
4.12 Internal microphone ................................................................................................4-27
4.13 MDC module...........................................................................................................4-28
4.14 Speaker....................................................................................................................4-29
4.15 Cover assembly.......................................................................................................4-31
4.16 RTC battery.............................................................................................................4-35
4.17 Battery latch assembly ............................................................................................4-36
4.18 CPU fan...................................................................................................................4-37
4.19 SD board/System board ..........................................................................................4-38
4.20 Heat sink/CPU.........................................................................................................4-40
4.21 LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board.........................................................................4-44
4.22 LCD unit .................................................................................................................4-48
4.23 LCD cable/LED cable .............................................................................................4-51
4.24 Wireless LAN antenna ............................................................................................4-56
4.25 Hinge assembly.......................................................................................................4-58
4.26 Fluorescent lamp.....................................................................................................4-60
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) ix
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ........................................................................ A-1
Appendix B Board Layout...............................................................................................B-1
Appendix C Pin Assignments......................................................................................... C-1
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes ............................................................... D-1
Appendix E Key Layout..................................................................................................E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams.........................................................................................F-1
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures .......................................................................... G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures..................................................................... H-1
Appendix I Reliability.....................................................................................................I-1
Appendix J Key FD.........................................................................................................J-1
x PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Chapter 1
Hardware Overview
1 Hardware Overview
1-ii PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
1 Hardware Overview
1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-iii
Chapter 1 Contents
1.1 Features ......................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Hard Disk Drive.........................................................................................................1-9
1.3 Keyboard..................................................................................................................1-10
1.4 Optical Drive............................................................................................................1-11
1.4.1 CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive ................................................................1-11
1.4.2 DVD-multi Drive................................................................................1-12
1.5 TFT Color Display...................................................................................................1-13
1.5.1 LCD Module.......................................................................................1-13
1.5.2 FL Inverter Board ...............................................................................1-14
1.6 Power Supply...........................................................................................................1-15
1.7 Batteries ...................................................................................................................1-17
1.7.1 Main Battery.......................................................................................1-17
1.7.2 Main Battery Charging Control..........................................................1-18
1.7.3 RTC battery........................................................................................1-19
1.8 AC Adapter..............................................................................................................1-20
1 Hardware Overview
1-iv PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Figures
Figure 1-1 Front of the computer.....................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-2 System unit configuration..............................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 System block diagram....................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-4 2.5-inch HDD.................................................................................................1-9
Figure 1-5 Keyboard......................................................................................................1-10
Tables
Table 1-1 2.5-inch HDD specifications..........................................................................1-9
Table 1-2 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications ....................................................1-11
Table 1-3 DVD-Multi drive specifications..................................................................1-12
Table 1-4 LCD module specifications (TMD-maid 12.1 TFT)....................................1-13
Table 1-5 FL inverter board specifications ..................................................................1-14
Table 1-6 Power supply output specifications .............................................................1-15
Table 1-7 Battery specifications ...................................................................................1-17
Table 1-8 Operating time..............................................................................................1-17
Table 1-9 Maintaining time..........................................................................................1-17
Table 1-10 Time required for charging battery..............................................................1-18
Table 1-11 RTC battery charging time...........................................................................1-19
Table 1-12 Maintaining time..........................................................................................1-19
Table 1-13 AC adapter specifications ............................................................................1-20
1.1 Features 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-1
1 Features
1.1 Features
The PORTEGE A200 series are an ultra thin and lightweight PC realizing cable-less
environment on a table by wireless function with a Mobile Intel® Pentium®-M processor or
Intel® Celeron®-M processor realizing high performance.
There are some models in the PORTEGE A200. For the configuration of each model, refer
the parts list.
? Microprocessor
Intel Mobile® Pentium® -M Processor
A 1.60GHz Intel Mobile® Pentium-M Processor with a 1.60GHz internal clock,
400MHz bus and 1.308V to 0.748V core operation.
Intel Mobile® Celeron®-M Processor
A 1.4GHz Intel Mobile® Celeron®-M Processor with a 1.4GHz internal clock,
400MHz bus.
? Cache memory
Intel Mobile® Pentium®-M Processor has 64KB primary cache and 2MB secondary
cache.
Intel Mobile® Celeron®-M Processor has 64KB primary cache and 512KB secondary
cache.
? Memory
Two memory slots are equipped. Memory module can be installed up to 2GB
(2,048MB). Memory modules of 256MB, 512MB and 1GB(1,024MB) available.
? VGA/VRAM
A VGA controller is built in MontaraGM+.
VRAM: Maximum 64MB when the capacity of system memory is 256MB or more.
Maximum 32MB when the capacity of system memory is 128MB or less.
? HDD
Built-in 2.5-inch x 9.5mm height, 40GB or 60GB HDD, depending on the model.
? USB FDD (Optional)
Supports a USB 3.5-inch FDD, which connected to a USB port, supports 720KB and
1.44MB formats and enables booting from system FD.
1 Hardware Overview 1.1 Features
1-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
? Display
LCD and CRT can be displayed at the same time.
LCD
Built-in 12.1 inch, 262,144 colors, XGA (1,024?768 dots), thin type low
temperature poly-silicon TFT color display.
CRT
Supported via a RGB connector.
TV-out (S-Video output)
Has a TV output terminal.
? Optical drive
Built-in a CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive or DVD-Multi drive.
? Keyboard
An-easy-to-use 84-key (US) or 85-key (UK) keyboard provides a numeric keypad
overlay for fast numeric data entry or for cursor and page control. The keyboard
supports a Windows key and an application key.
? Touch pad
Touch pad is installed as a pointing device.
? Battery
The RTC battery is mounted inside the computer.
The main battery is a detachable lithium-ion main battery (10.8V-4,400mAh) and the
RTC battery is a lithium ion battery (2.4V-16mAh).
? USB (Universal Serial Bus)
The computer comes with three USB ports that comply with the USB 2.0 standard.
The USB 2.0 enables daisy-chain connection of up to 127 USB-equipped devices and
480Mbps serial data transfer. It is designed for easy configuration by a Plug-and-Play
operating system and provides hot insertion/ejection capability.
? PC card slot
A Type II PC card is acceptable.
1.1 Features 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-3
? SD card slot
The computer is equipped with a SD Card slot that can accommodate Secure Digital
flash memory cards. SD cards let the user easily transfer data from devices, such as
digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants that use SD Card flash-memory. The
cards have a high-level of security and copy protection features.
? Sound system
The sound system is equipped with the following:
? Stereo Speaker
? Built-in Microphone
? Volume control knob
? Headphone jack
? External microphone jack
? One touch button
An Internet button, mail button and Toshiba Console button are installed.
? Built-in Modem
The computer contains a MDC, enabling data and fax communication. It supports
ITU-T V.90 (V.92). The transfer rates are 56 Kbps for data reception, 33.6 Kbps for
data transmission, and 14,400 bps for fax transmission. However, the actual speed
depends on the line quality. The RJ11 modem jack is used to accommodate a
telephone line. Both of V.90 and V.92 are supported only in USA, Canada and
Australia. Only V.90 is available in other regions.
? LAN
The computer is equipped with LAN circuits that support Ethernet LAN (10 mega
bits per second, 10BASE-T) and Fast Ethernet LAN (100 mega bits per second, 100
BASE-TX).
? Wireless LAN (mini PCI Card slot )
The computer is equipped with a mini-PCI Type III wireless LAN board that supports
802.11 b/g (Intel or Askey made) or 802 11/b (Intel made).
This function can be switched on and off by a switch on the computer.
? IEEE1394
1 Hardware Overview 1.1 Features
1-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
The computer comes with one IEEE 1394 port. It enables high-speed data transfer
directly from external devices such as digital video cameras.
1.1 Features 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-5
Figure 1-1 shows the front of the computer and Figure 1-2 shows the system units
configuration.
Figure 1-1 Front of the computer
Figure 1-2 System unit configuration
1 Hardware Overview 1.1 Features
1-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Figure 1-3 shows the system block diagram.
Figure 1-3 System block diagram
1.1 Features 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-7
The PC contains the following components.
? CPU
Intel Mobile® Pentium®-M Processor
A 1.60GHz Intel Mobile® Pentium® M Processor with a 1.60GHz internal clock,
400MHz bus and 1.308V to 0.748V core operation.
Cache memory: 64KB primary cache and 2MB secondary cache.
Intel Mobile® Celeron®-M Processor
A 1.4GHz Intel Mobile® Celeron®-M Processor with a 1.4GHz internal clock,
400MHz bus.
Cache memory: 64KB primary cache and 512KB secondary cache.
? Memory
Two memory slots (DDR266). Memory modules of 256MB, 512MB or
1GB(1,024MB) can be installed to a maximum of 2GB (2,048MB).
? 3.3V operation
? Access time 6ns
? Memory Supporting PC-2700
? BIOS ROM (FWH)
? 8Mbit (512K?16-bit chip)
? PCI chipset
This gate array incorporates the following elements and functions.
? North Bridge: Intel 855GME (GMCH-M)
? Banias Processor System bus support
? DRAM control ( supports DDR200/DDR256)
? Built-in graphic control
? RGB, DVI, DVO interface
? AGP master slave interface (Complies with AGP V2.0)
? PCI interface (Complies with PCI Rev 2.2)
? Complies with ACPI 1.0
? Supports Intel Speed step Technology
? 732-ball (37.5x37.5mm) micro FCBGA package
1 Hardware Overview 1.1 Features
1-8 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
? South Bridge: Intel 82801DBM (ICH4-M)
? PCI 3.3V/5V tolerance interface
? Steerable PCI interrupts for PCI device Plug-and-Play
? Enhanced DMA controller
? Interrupt controller
? Counter/timers
? Distributed DMA supported
? PC/PCI DMA supported
? Serial IRQ supported
? Low Pin Count (LPC) host controller
? Plug-and-Play supported
? ACPI supporting features
? Built-in PCI IDE controller
? USB interface
? SMBus interface
? Audio system
? SW modem interface
? 421-ball (31mm x 31mm) BGA package
? PC card controller (YEBISUSS)
? PCI interface (PCI Revision2.2)
? Chipset interface
? CardBus/PC Card controller (Yenta Version2.2) :2 slots
? SD memory card controller (SDHC Ver.1.2)
? SDIO card controller (Ver.1.1)
? Smart card interface
? SIO(UART) controller(MS Debug Port Specification ver.1.0)
? Docking station interface
? External device interface
? 1.0mm pitch pin/17mm PBGA package
? VGA controller
Included in the North Bridge.
? Modem controller
Supported by Agere-made Modem controller and Askey-made MDC using the
secondary AC97 Line.
? LAN controller (Intel–made ED82562ET (Kinnereth))
Controls LAN and supports 100Base-TX and 10Base-T.
1.1 Features 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-9
? Other main system chips
? EC/KBC (Mitsubishi-made M306K9FCLRP)
? PSC (Toshiba made TMP87PM48V01U)
? Clock Generator (ICS-made ICS950812GT)
? TV Encoder (Chrontel-made CH7011A)
? SOUND CODEC (ADI-made AD1981B)
? AMP (Matsushita-Made AN12940AA-VF)
1 Hardware Overview 1.2 Hard Disk Drive
1-10 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
1.2 Hard Disk Drive
The HDD is a random-access, non-volatile storage device. It has a non-removable 2.5-inch
magnetic disk and mini-Winchester type magnetic heads. The computer is equipped with a
40 or 60GB HDD.
Figure 1-4 shows a view of the 2.5-inch HDD and Tables 1-1 lists the specifications.
Figure 1-4 2.5-inch HDD
Table 1-1 2.5-inch HDD specifications
specifications
Parameter TOSHIBA
HDD2190B
TOSHIBA
HDD2189B
Outline Width (mm) 69.85 69.85
dimensions Height (mm) 9.5 9.5
Depth (mm) 100.0 100.0
Weight (g) 95 95
Storage size (formatted) 40 60
Speed (RPM) 4200 4,200
Data transfer speed (Mb/s) 175.0-341.7 175.0-341.7
Interface transfer rate (MB/s) 100 max.
(Ultra DMA mode)
Track density (Ktpi) 88.1 88.1
Average seek time (ms)
Read
Write
12
-
12
-
Start time (ms) 4 4
1.3 Keyboard 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-11
1.3 Keyboard
The 84-key (US) or 85-key (UK) keyboard that consists of character keys and control keys is
mounted The keyboard is connected to membrane connector on the system board and
controlled by the keyboard controller on the system board.
Figure1-5 is a view of the keyboard.
See Appendix E about a layout of the keyboard.
Figure 1-5 Keyboard
1 Hardware Overview 1.4 Optical Drive
1-12 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
1.4 Optical Drive
1.4.1 CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive
This drive is a combination of DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW Drive. It is full-size and runs
either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adaptor. This drive reads
CD-ROM at maximum 24-speed, reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed and writes CD-R at
maximum 24-speed, and writes CD-RW at 4-speed.
The specifications are listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive specifications
Parameter Matsushita
G8CC0001N710
Outline Width (mm) 128
Dimensions Height (mm) 9.5
Depth (mm) 126
Date transfer speed
READ DVD-ROM
CD-ROM Max. 8X CAV
Max. 24x CAV
Write CD-R
CD-RW 4X, 8x(CLV), Max. 24X(ZCLV)
4X (CLV)
ATAPI interface PIO mode
DMA mode
Ultra DMA mode
16.6MB/s (PIO Mode4)
16.6 MB/s(Multiword Mode2)
33.3MB (Mode2)
Buffer memory 2MB
Access time DVD-ROM
CD-ROM 170ms typ. (1/3 stroke)
150ms typ. (1/3 stroke)
CD supported CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA
CD-R, CD-RW
Photo CD, Video CD
CD-Extra(CD+), CD text
DVD: DVD-ROM DVD-R
DVD-RW(Ver. 1.1)
DVD-RAM(2.6GB/4.7GB)
DVD+R, DVD+RW
1.4 Optical Drive 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-13
1.4.2 DVD-multi Drive
This drive is a combination of CD-R/RW, DVD-R/RW and DVD-RAM Drive. It is full-size
and runs either 12cm (4.72-inch) or 8cm (3.15-inch) DVD/CDs without an adapter. This
drive reads CD-ROM at maximum 24-speed, reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed, writes
CD-R at maximum 16-speed, writes CD-RW at maximum 4-speed, writes DVD-R at
maximum 2-speed, writes DVD-RW at maximum 2-speed and writes DVD-RAM at
maximum 2-speed.
Specifications for the DVD multi drive are described in table 1-3.
Table 1-3 DVD-Multi drive specifications
Item Matsushita
G8CC0001P710
ATAPI Burst (MB/sec) 33.3 (Ultra DMA MODE2)
16.6 (PIO MODE4, Multi word MODE2)
Average access time (ms) CD-ROM 150 (typ.)
DVD-ROM 180 (typ.)
Data buffer (MB) 2
Speed (Read)r CD-ROM 24x max. (CAV)
DVD-ROM 8x max (CAV)
Speed (Write) CD-R 16x max. (ZCLV)
CD-RW 4x (CLV)
HSRW 4x, 8x (CLV)
DVD-R 1x, 2x (CLV)
DVD-RW 1x, 2x (CLV)
DVD-RAM 2x (ZCLV)
Supported Format CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW
CD-ROMXA
Photo CD, Video CD
CD-Extra(CD+), CD-text
DVD :DVD-VIDO, DVD-ROM
DVD-R (3.9GB, 4.7GB)
DVD-RW (Ver.1.1)
DVD-RAM (2.6GB, 4.7GB, 9.4GB)
DVD+R, DVD+RW
1 Hardware Overview 1.5 TFT Color Display
1-14 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
1.5 TFT Color Display
The TFT color display consists of a LCD module and FL inverter board.
1.5.1 LCD Module
The LCD module used for the TFT color display uses a backlight as the light source and can
display images and characters of 262,144 colors with 1024?768 resolution. The video
controller is incorporated into the North Bridge chip and can control both internal and
external XGA-support displays simultaneously.
Table 1-4 shows the specifications.
Table 1-4 LCD module specifications (TMD-made 12.1 TFT)
Specifications
Item G33C0000J210
Number of Dots 1024(W)?768(H)
Dot spacing (mm) 0.240(H) x 0.240(V)
Display range (mm) 245.76(H) x 184.32(V)
Outline dimensions 261.0(w) x 199.0(H) x 5.0Max(D)
1.5 TFT Color Display 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-15
1.5.2 FL Inverter Board
The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module FL.
Table 1-5 lists the FL inverter board specifications.
Table 1-5 FL inverter board specifications
Specifications
Item G71C00011121
Input Voltage (V) DC 5
Voltage (Vrms) 750(MAX) Output
Current (mArms) 6.0(MAX)
1 Hardware Overview 1.6 Power Supply
1-16 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
1.6 Power Supply
The power supply supplies 19 different voltages to the system board.
The power supply micro controller has the following functions.
1. Judges that the DC power supply (AC adapter) is connected to the computer.
2. Detects DC output and circuit malfunctions.
3. Controls the battery icon, and DC IN icon.
4. Turns the battery charging system on and off and detects a fully charged battery.
5. Turns the power supply on and off.
6. Provides more accurate detection of a low battery.
7. Calculates the remaining battery capacity.
8. Controls the transmission of the status signal of the main battery.
Table 1-6 lists the power supply output specifications.
Table 1-6 Power supply output specifications(1/2)
Name Voltage [V] Use
PPV 1.308-0.748 CPU,GMCH, ICH4-M
PTV 1.05 CPU, GMCH, ICH4-M
1R35-P1V 1.35 GMCH
1R25-P1V 1.25 DDR-SDRAM termination
MR1R25-
B1V 1.25 GMCH, DDR-SDRAM
1R5-P1V 1.5 TV, GMCH, IVH4-M
1R5-S1V 1.5 ICH4-M
2R5-B2V 2.5 GMCH, DDR-SDRAM
P3V 3.3 Clock Generator, Thermal Sensor, GMCH, SDRAM(SPD), TV,
IEEE1394, ICH4-M, AD1981B, mini-PCI, EC/KBC, LCD,
SD card Power, KINNERTH
E3V 3.3 YEBISUSS, PC Card Power, mini-PCI, MDC
BT-P3V 3.3 Bluetooth
S3V 3.3 ICH4-M, EC/KBC, Flash Memory, PSC
P5V 5 CRT, ICH4-M, FL inverter, LEDs, HDD, ODD, KB, PAD,
Bluetooth Power
1.6 Power Supply 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-17
Table 1-6 Power supply output specifications(2/2)
Name Voltage [V] Use
SND-P5V 5 AN12940AA(Amp)
A4R7-P4V 4.7 AD1981B, Line IN, Amp, Head Phone, Ring Phone
E5V 5 PC Card Power, USB Power
M5V 5 ICH4-M, MAX6501, LEDs
MCV 5 PSC
R3V 2.0-3.5 ICH4-M(RTC)
1 Hardware Overview 1.7 Batteries
1-18 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
1.7 Batteries
The PC has the following two batteries.
? Main battery
? Real time clock (RTC) battery
Table 1-7 lists the specifications for these two batteries.
Table 1-7 Battery specifications
Battery Name Battery Element Output Voltage Capacity
Main battery G71C0003Y110 Lithium ion 10.8 V 4,400 mAh
Real time clock
(RTC) battery P71035009115 Lithium ion 2.4 V 16 mAh
1.7.1 Main Battery
The main battery is the primary power supply for the computer when the AC adapter is not
connected. In resume (instant recovery) mode, the main battery maintains the current status
of the computer.
The approximate operating time on fully charged battery is as follows:
Table 1-8 Operating time
Model Operating time
Pentium model About 4.6 hours
Celeron model About 4.3 hours
The approximate maintaining time of fully charged battery after power off is as follows:
Table 1-9 Maintaining time
Boot mode Standby mode
About 25days About 6 days
1.7 Batteries 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-19
1.7.2 Main Battery Charging Control
Battery charging is controlled by a power supply microprocessor. The power supply
microprocessor controls power supply and detects a full charge when the AC adapter and
battery are connected to the computer. The system charges the battery using quick charge or
trickle charge.
? Quick Battery Charge
When the AC adapter is connected, normal charges is used while the system is turned
on, and quick charge is used while the system is turned off or in suspend mode. Table
1-10 shows the approximate time required for charging battery.
Table 1-10 Time required for charging battery
Main battery Charging Time
Normal charge About 4 to 10 hours
Quick charge About 2.5 hours
Quick battery charge is stopped in the following cases.
1. The main battery is fully charged.
2. The main battery is removed.
3. Main battery or AC adapter voltage is abnormal.
4. Charging current is abnormal.
? Trickle charge
When the main battery is fully charged and the AC adapter is plugged in, the power
supply microcontroller automatically switches from quick charge to trickle charge.
1 Hardware Overview 1.7 Batteries
1-20 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
1.7.3 RTC Battery
The RTC battery provides the power supply to maintain the date, time, and other system
information in memory.
Table 1-11 lists the battery charging time.
Table 1-11 RTC battery charging time
Item Time
Charging
time AC adapter or main battery in use
(Power ON) about 14 hours
Table 1-12 lists the approximate maintaining time of fully charged battery after power off.
Table 1-12 Maintaining time
Maintaining Time
RTC battery About 30 days
1.8 AC Adapter 1 Hardware Overview
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 1-21
1.8 AC Adapter
The AC adapter is also used to charge the battery.
Table 1-13 lists the AC adapter specifications.
Table 1-13 AC adapter specifications
Specification
Parameter G71C0002S310
Input voltage AC 90 to 264V
Input frequency 50Hz/60Hz
Input current/
power 1.5A or less
(100Vac, 240Vac/4A load)
Output voltage DC 15V
Output current 4.0A
Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Procedures
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2-ii PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-iii
Chapter 2 Contents
2.1 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................2-2
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting..................................................................................2-6
Procedure 1 Power Supply Icon Check......................................................2-7
Procedure 2 Error Code Check...................................................................2-9
Procedure 3 Connection Check................................................................2-14
Procedure 4 Quick Charge Check ............................................................2-14
Procedure 5 Replacement Check..............................................................2-15
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................2-16
Procedure 1 Message Check ....................................................................2-17
Procedure 2 Debug Port Check ................................................................2-19
Procedure 3 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-27
Procedure 4 Replacement Check..............................................................2-27
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting .....................................................................................2-28
Procedure 1 FDD Head Cleaning Check..................................................2-28
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-29
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-30
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting .............................................................................................2-31
Procedure 1 Message Check ....................................................................2-31
Procedure 2 Partition Check.....................................................................2-32
Procedure 3 Format Check.......................................................................2-33
Procedure 4 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-34
Procedure 5 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-35
2.7 Optical Drive Troubleshooting ................................................................................2-36
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-36
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-36
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2-iv PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.8 Display Troubleshooting..........................................................................................2-37
Procedure 1 External Monitor Check.......................................................2-37
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-37
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Cable Check .....................................2-37
Procedure 4 Replacement Check..............................................................2-38
2.9 Keyboard Troubleshooting ......................................................................................2-39
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-39
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-39
2.10 Touch Pad Troubleshooting.....................................................................................2-40
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-40
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-40
2.11 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting.................................................................................2-41
Procedure 1 Check on Windows XP ........................................................2-41
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-41
2.12 Modem Troubleshooting..........................................................................................2-42
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-42
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-42
2.13 LAN Troubleshooting..............................................................................................2-43
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-43
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check..........................2-43
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................2-44
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .........................2-44
Procedure 2 Connector Check..................................................................2-45
Procedure 3 Replacement Check..............................................................2-46
2.15 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting...............................................................................2-47
Procedure 1 Transmitting-Receiving Check ............................................2-47
Procedure 2 Antenna Connection Check .................................................2-48
Procedure 3 Replacement Check..............................................................2-48
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-v
Figures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart.............................................................................2-3
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for debug port test ...................................................................2-19
Tables
Table 2-1 Battery icon....................................................................................................2-7
Table 2-2 DC IN icon.....................................................................................................2-7
Table 2-3 Error code.......................................................................................................2-9
Table 2-4 Result code...................................................................................................2-15
Table 2-5 Debugging port status ..................................................................................2-20
Table 2-6 FDD error code and status ...........................................................................2-29
Table 2-7 2.5” HDD error code and status...................................................................2-34
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2-vi PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.1 Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-1
2
2.1 Troubleshooting
Chapter 2 describes how to determine which Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer is
causing the computer to malfunction. (The “FRU” means the replaceable unit in the field.)
The FRUs covered are:
1. Power supply 8. Touch pad
2. System Board 9. SD card slot
3. USB FDD 10. Modem
4. HDD 11. LAN
5. Optical Drive 12. Sound
6. Display 13. Wireless LAN
7. Keyboard
The Detailed replacement procedures are given in Chapter 4. Test Program operations are
described in Chapter 3.
The following tools are necessary for implementing the Diagnostics procedures:
For tools required for executing the Test Program, refer to the Chapter3. For tools required for
disassembling/assembling, refer to the Chapter 4.
1. A set of tools for debugging port test (test cable, test board, RS-232C cross cable,
display, D port FD)
2. A PC with a serial port (for displaying debug port test result)
3. Toshiba MS-DOS system FD
4. An external CRT display(for Display trouble shooting)
5. A SD card(for SD card slot trouble shooting)
6. An external microphone(for Sound trouble shooting)
7. Headphone(for Sound trouble shooting)
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
Use the flowchart in Figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which FRU malfunctions. Before
going through the flowchart steps, check the following:
? Ask the user if a password is registered and, if it is, ask him or her to enter the
password.
? Make sure that Toshiba Windows® XP is installed on the hard disk. Non-Toshiba
operating systems can cause the computer malfunction.
? Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.
? Make sure the USB FDD and optical drive are empty.
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-3
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-5
If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The Test
program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the Log Utilities
function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error(s), then perform the appropriate
troubleshooting procedures as follows:
1. If an error is detected on the System test, Memory test, Expansion test or Real timer
test, perform the System Board Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.
2. If an error is detected on the Floppy Disk test, perform the USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.5.
3. If an error is detected on the Hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
4. If an error is detected on the Optical drive test, perform the Optical Drive
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.7.
5. If an error is detected on the Display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.8.
6. If an error is detected on the Keyboard test, perform the Keyboard Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.9.
7. If an error is detected on the Touch pad test, perform the Touch Pad Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.10.
8. If an error is detected on the SD Card Slot test, perform the SD Card Slot
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.11.
9. If an error is detected on the Modem test, perform the Modem Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.12.
10. If an error is detected on the LAN test, perform the LAN Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.13.
11. If an error is detected on the Sound test, perform the Sound Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.14.
12. If an error is detected on the Wireless LAN test, perform the Wireless LAN
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.15.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
The power supply controller controls many functions and components. To determine if the
power supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other
Procedures as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Power Supply Icon Check
Procedure 2: Error Code Check
Procedure 3: Connection Check
Procedure 4: Quick Charge Check
Procedure 5: Replacement Check
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-7
Procedure 1 Power Supply Icon Check
The following two icons indicate the power supply status:
? Battery icon
? DC IN icon
The power supply controller uses the power supply status with the Battery icon and the DC IN
icon as listed in the tables below.
Table 2-1 Battery icon
*1: goes to hibernation
*2: in hibernation
Table 2-2 DC IN icon
*3: When the power supply controller detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks
orange. It shows an error code.
Battery icon Power supply status
Lights orange Battery is charged and the external DC is input. It has no relation with
ON/OFF of the system power.
Lights green Battery is fully charged and the external DC is input. It has no relation
with ON/OFF of the system power.
Blinks orange
(even intervals) The battery level is low (*1) while the system power is ON.
Flashes orange The battery level is low (*2) and the power switch is pressed on in the
battery driving.
Doesn’t light Any condition other than those above.
DC IN icon Power supply status
Lights green DC power is being supplied from the AC adapter.
Blinks orange Power supply malfunction (*3)
Doesn’t light Any condition other than those above.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2-8 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
When icons are blinking, perform the following procedure.
1. Remove the battery pack and the AC adapter and cut off the power supply to the
computer by force.
2. Re-attach the battery pack and the AC adapter.
If icons are still blinking after the operation above, check the followings:
Check 1 If the DC IN icon blinks orange, go to Procedure 2.
Check 2 If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 3.
Check 3 If the battery icon does not light orange or green, go to Procedure 4.
Caution: Use a recommended AC adapter (G71C0002S310).
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-9
Procedure 2 Error Code Check
If the power supply microprocessor detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks orange. The
blink pattern indicates an error as shown below.
? Start Off for 2 seconds
? Error code (8 bit)
“1” On for one second
“0” On for half second
Interval between data bits Off for half second
The error code begins with LSB (Least Significant bit).
Example: Error code 11h (Error codes are given in hexadecimal format.)
Check 1 Convert the DC IN icon blink pattern into the hexadecimal error code and
compare it to the tables below. Then go to Check 2.
Table 2-3 Error code
Error code Location
1*h DC power supply (AC adapter)
2*h Main battery
4*h S3V output
5*h 1R5-C1V output
6*h 1R8-C1V output
7*h PPV output
8*h PTV output
9*h E5V output
A*h E3V output
B*h PPV output
C*h 1R35-P1V output
D*h 1R25-P1V output
E*h 2R5-B2V output
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2-10 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
? DC power supply (AC adapter)
Error code Meaning
10h AC Adapter output voltage is over 16.5V.
11h Commondock output voltage is over 16.5V.
12h Current from the DC power supply is over 6.05A.
13h Current from the DC power supply is over 0.5A when there is no load.
14h Abnormal current has been sensed 0[A].
? Main battery
Error code Meaning
21h Main battery charge current is over 6.05A.
22h Main battery discharge current is over 0.5A when there is no load.
23h Main battery charge current is over 3.1A when AC adapter is not
connected.
24h Abnormal current has been sensed 0[A].
25h Main battery charge current is over 0.3A.
? S3V output
Error code Meaning
40h S3V voltage is 3.14V or less when the computer is powered on/off.
45h S3V voltage is 3.14V or less at power-on. (CV support)
? 1R5-C1V output
Error code Meaning
50h 1R5-C1V voltage is over 1.8V when the computer is powered on/off.
51h 1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is powered on.
52h 1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less at power-on.
53h 1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less while the computer is suspended.
54h 1R5-C1V voltage is abnormal during shutdown. (CV support)
55h 1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is booting up.
(CV support)
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-11
? 1R8-C1V output
Error code Meaning
60h 1R8-C1V voltage is over 2.16V when the computer is powered on/off.
61h 1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is powered on.
62h 1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is booting up.
63h 1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less while the computer is suspended.
64h 1R8-C1V voltage is abnormal during shutdown.
65h 1R8-C1V voltage is 1.53V or less at power-on.
? PPV output
Error code Meaning
70h PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
71h PPV voltage is 0.56V or less when the computer is powered on.
72h PPV voltage is 0.56V or less at power-on.
73h PPV voltage is 0.56V or more when the computer is powered off.
? PTV output
Error code Meaning
80h PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.
81h PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is powered on.
82h PTV voltage is 0.89V or less at power-on.
83h PTV voltage is 0.89V or more when the computer is powered off.
84h PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is suspended.
? E5V output
Error code Meaning
90h E5V voltage is over 6.00V when the computer is powered on/off.
91h E5V voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is powered on.
92h E5V voltage is 4.50V or less at power-on.
93h E5V voltage is 4.50V or more when the computer is powered off.
94h E5V voltage is 4.50V or less while the computer is suspended.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2-12 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
? E3V output
Error code Meaning
A0h E3V voltage is over 3.96V when the computer is powered on/off.
A1h E3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is powered on.
A2h E3V voltage is 2.81V or less at power-on.
A3h E3V voltage is over 2.81V or more when the computer is powered off.
A4h E3V voltage is 2.81V or less while the computer is suspended.
? PPV output
Error code Meaning
B0h PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
B1h PPV voltage is 0.56V or less when the computer is powered on.
B2h PPV voltage is 0.56V or less at power-on.
B3h PPV voltage is 0.56V or more when the computer is powered off.
? 1R35-P1V output
Error code Meaning
C0h 1R35-P1V voltage is over 1.62V when the computer is powered on/off.
C1h 1R35-P1V voltage is 1.147V or less when the computer is powered on.
C2h 1R35-P1V voltage is 1.147V or less at power-on.
C3h 1R35-P1V voltage is 1.147V or more when the computer is powered
off.
C4h 1R35-P1V voltage is 1.147V or less while the computer is suspended.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-13
? 1R25-P1V output
Error code Meaning
D0h 1R25-P1V voltage is over 1.50V when the computer is powered on/off.
D1h 1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or less when the computer is powered on.
D2h 1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or less at power-on.
D3h 1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or more when the computer is powered
off.
D4h 1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063V or less while the computer is suspended.
? 2R5-B2V output
Error code Meaning
E0h 2R5-B2V voltage is over 3.00V when the computer is powered on/off.
E1h 2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125V or less when the computer is powered on.
E2h 2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125V or less at power-on.
E3h 2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125V or more when the computer is powered off.
E4h 2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125V or less while the computer is suspended.
Check 2 In the case of error code 10h or 12h:
? Make sure the AC adapter and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC
IN 15 V socket and wall outlet. If the cables are connected correctly, go to the
following step:
? Connect a new AC adapter and AC power cord. If the error still exists, go to
Procedure 5.
Check 3 In the case of error code 2Xh:
? Go to Procedure 3.
Check 4 For any other errors, go to Procedure 5.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2-14 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Procedure 3 Connection Check
The wiring diagram related to the power supply is shown below:
Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform starting from Check 1.
Check 1 Plug the AC power cord from the wall outlet and check it with a tester.
If the cord is cut, replace with a new one. If the cord is not cut, go to Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the AC adapter and the AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC-
IN 15 V jack and wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, go to Check 3.
Check 3 Check if the DC-IN jack is loosed. If so, go to Procedure 5. If not, go to Check 4.
Check 4 Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.
Procedure 4 Quick Charge Check
The power supply may not charge the battery pack. Perform the following procedures:
1. Reinstall the battery pack.
2. Attach the AC adaptor and turn on the power. If you cannot turn on the power, go to
Procedure 5.
3. Run the Diagnostic test, go to System test and execute subtest 06 (Quick charge)
described in Chapter 3.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-15
4. When charge is complete, the diagnostics test displays the result code. Check the result
code against the table below and perform any necessary check.
Table 2-4 Result code
Result code Contents Check items
0 The battery is charging normally. Normal
1 The battery is fully charged. Normal
2 The AC adaptor is not connected. Check 1
3 The AC adaptor output voltage is not normal. Check 1
4 The battery is not installed. Check 2
5 The battery’s output voltage is not normal. Check 3
6 The battery’s temperature is not normal. Check 4
7 A bad battery is installed. Check 2
8 Any other problems. Check 5
Check 1 Make sure the AC adaptor and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC IN
jack and the wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, replace the AC
adaptor (and/or AC power cord, if necessary). Go to Check2.
Check 2 Make sure the battery is properly installed. If the battery is properly installed, go to
Check 3.
Check 3 The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the
battery pack. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.
Check 4 The battery’s temperature is too hot or cold. Return the temperature to a normal
operating condition. If the battery pack still is not charged, go to Check 5.
Check 5 Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack still is not charged, go
to Procedure 5.
Procedure 5 Replacement Check
The system board may be disconnected or damaged. Replace the system board with a new one
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2-16 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the system board is defective. Start with Procedure
1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed. The procedures described in this
section are:
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Debug port Check
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-17
Procedure 1 Message Check
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. The IRT tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.
? If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.
? If there is no error message, go to Procedure 2.
? If MS-DOS or Windows XP is properly loaded, go to Procedure 4.
Check 1 If one of the following error messages is displayed on the screen, press the F1 key
as the message instructs. These errors occur when the system configuration
preserved in the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the same as the actual
configuration or when the data is lost.
If you press the F1 key as the message instructs, the SETUP screen appears to set
the system configuration. If any other error message is displayed, perform Check 2.
(a)*** Bad HDD type ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(b)*** Bad configuration ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(c)*** Bad memory size ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(d)*** Bad time function ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(e)*** Bad check sum (CMOS) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(f)*** Bad check sum (ROM) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(g)RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is inconsistent
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time
Check 2 If the following error message is displayed on the screen press any key as the
message instructs.
The following error message appears when data stored in RAM under the resume
function is lost because the battery has become discharged or the system board is
damaged. Go to Procedure 3.
WARNING: RESUME FAILURE.
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
If any other error message is displayed, perform Check 3.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2-18 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Check 3 The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system stops
or an error message appears.
If one of the following error messages (1) through (17), (22) or (23) is displayed,
go to Procedure 4.
If error message (18) is displayed, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.9.
If error message (19), (20) or (21) is displayed, go to the 2.5” HDD
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.6.
(1) PIT ERROR
(2) MEMORY REFRESH ERROR
(3) TIMER CH.2 OUT ERROR
(4) CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR
(5) CMOS BAD BATTERY ERROR
(6) FIRST 64KB MEMORY ERROR
(7) FIRST 64KB MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(8) VRAM ERROR
(9) SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR
(10) SYSTEM MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(11) EXTENDED MEMORY ERROR
(12) EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(13) DMA PAGE REGISTER ERROR
(14) DMAC #1 ERROR
(15) DMAC #2 ERROR
(16) PIC #1 ERROR
(17) PIC #2 ERROR
(18) KBC ERROR
(19) HDC ERROR
(20) HDD #0 ERROR
(21) HDD #1 ERROR
(22) TIMER INTERRUPT ERROR
(23) RTC UPDATE ERROR
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-19
Procedure 2 Debug Port Check
Check the D port status by a debug port test. The tool for debug port test is shown below.
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for debug port test
The test procedures are follows:
1. Connect the debug test cable to the connector PJ2000 of the system board. For
disassembling to connect the test cable, refer to Chapter 4.
2. Connect the debug port test cable and RS-232C cross-cable to the test board.
3. Connect the RS-232C cross-cable to the PC that displays the test results.
4. Boot the computer in MS-DOS mode.
5. Execute GETDPORT.COM in the text menu in CPU REAL mode. (Insert the FD for
starting D port into FDD and input “FD starting drive:>dport”.)
6. When the D port status is FFFFh (normal status), go to Procedure 3.
7. When the D port status falls into any status in Table 2-5, go to Procedure 4.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2-20 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table 2-5 Debugging port status (1/7)
D port
Status Contents
F000h
Clears software rest bit.
Permits A20 line.
Initializes special register and Intel chipset.
Initializes PIT CH0 only (for HOLD_ON).
Initializes flag of factor rewriting of BIOS.
Checks CHECK SUM.
Transition to protect mode.
Calculates the checksum of Boot block? HLT at checksum error
Calculates the checksum of block other than Boot block.
F001h Checks rewriting EC/KBC?Goes to BIOS rewriting process at request for
rewriting.
Executes KBC initializing sequence.
Transmits KBC enable command.
Checks F12 key.
F002h Checks for request of BIOS rewriting?Checksum error of blocks other than
BootBlock, at the request of F12 rewriting request.
F003h Transfers the process to the System BIOS IRT side.
BIOS rewriting process
Initializes peculiar HW to the model.
Initializes GPIO I/O space.
Permits BIOS writing.
Controls serial interrupts.
Releases the write-protect of BIOS.
Permits the SMBus I/O space.
Permits the access to SMBus.
Configuration of DRAM
Permits cache (only L1 Cache).
Memory clear
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-21
Table 2-5 Debugging port status (2/7)
D port
status Contents
F004h Changes ROM BIOS to RAM BIOS.
F005h Stores scan codes.
Sets TASK_1ms_TSC.
F0006h Inputs key.
Reads CHGBIOSA.EXE/CHGFIRMA.EXE.
FDC RESET
Sets parameters for 2HD(1.44MB) and the transmission rate.
Reads the first sector. If 1.44MB 2HD, decides.
Sets the parameter for 2DD(720KB) and the transmission rate.
Searches CHGBIOSA.EXE from the root directory.
Calculates the head and sector for start directory.
Reads one sector from the root directory.
Searches the entry of “CHGBIOSA.EXE”/”CHGFIRMA.EXE” from the
sector.
Reads the EXE header of “CHGBIOSA.EXE”/ “HGFIRMA.EXE”.
Goes to input key, when any error generates.
Executes “CHGBIOSA.EXE”/ “CHGFIRMA.EXE”.
(F003h) Prohibits cache.
Initializes special registers.
F100h Initializes PIT channel 1 (sets the refresh interval to 30µs.).
F101h Checks the type and size of DRAM (in Cold Boot).
Checks the DRAM size.
When the DRAM size = 0, it halts.
Tests the stack area of SM-RAM?When it can not be used for stack, it
halts.
F102h Cache configuration
Permits cache.(L1 Cache only)
Access test of CMOS (in COLD boot only).?When any error, it halts.
Checks the battery level of CMOS.
Checks the checksum of CMOS.
Initializes CMOS data (1).
Sets IRT status. (setting boot status and IRT busy flag, remaining bit =0)
Stores the DRAM size.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2-22 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table 2-5 Debugging port status (3/7)
D port
status Contents
F103h Resume branch (in COLD boot only)
No resume at CMOS error
No resume, if resume status code is not set.
Checks for resume error.
ICH4-M Power Failure error?Resume error 7Ah
Checks checksum of SM-RAM.?Resume error 73H
Checks change of memory configuration.?Resume error 73H
Checks checksum of RAM area of system BIOS. ?Resume error 79H
Goes to resume process (RESUME_MAIN).
Resume error process
Forbids all SMIs.
Clears resume status.
Returns to ROM.
Forwards the area of C0000h~EFFFFh to PCI. (Forbids DRAM)
Sets resume error factors.
Copies ROM/RAM of system BIOS. ?halts at error.
F104h Initializes SM RAM.
Checks WakeUp factor.
Rewrites on SM RAM base and stores CPU state map.
Permits only SMI by ASMI.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-23
Table 2-5 Debugging port status (4/7)
D port
status Contents
F105h Initializes devices that are necessary to be initialized before initializing PCI bus.
Tests and initializes PIT.(only in COLD boot)
Sets test patterns to PIT#0 channel 0.
Checks if the test patterns can be read.
Initializes PIT channel 0 (sets the interval of timer interrupts to 55ms.
Initializes PIT channel 2. (sets the frequency of sound generator to
664Hz.)
Tests PIT channel 1. (Check if the refresh signal operates correctly in the
condition that the refresh frequency is 30µs.)
Tests PIT channel 2. (Check if the speaker gate operates correctly.)
Measures CPU clock.
Permits SMI other than auto off function.
Check if the Input power is over the rated one.
Controls battery-charging current.
Check if the AC adapter current is over the rated one.
Executes dividing process for measuring IRT time.
Sets the clock generator.
Checks the parameter block A.
Initializes CPU.
Measures the frequency of CPU and difference of frequency of Gsv High and
Low.
Checks if the CPU supports Geyserville.
Sets the CPU clock to High.
F106h Stores the memory size of each ROW to the buffer.
Reads EC version.
Renews the flash ROM type.
Judges the destination (Japan or overseas) from the DMI data.
Checks CMOS default setting. (Bad Battery, Bad checksum (ROM, CMOS)) ?
sets to default.
Initializes ACPI table. (for execution of option ROM)
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2-24 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table 2-5 Debugging port status (5/7)
D port
status Content
F106h Initializes devices which are necessary to be initialized before initializing
PCI bus.
AC’97 control
Initializes temperature control information.
Initializes HC and recognizes devices.
Turns off the display controls “Reset”.
Initializes KBC.
Initializes sounds.
Obtains the multi box status of PC.
Starts HC initializing sequence and recognizes devices.
Controls permission/prohibition of LAN.
Initializes PIC.
Tests PIC.
Initializes password.
F107h Initializes PCI bus.
Checks WakeUp factor.
F108h Raises the task waiting for the completion of INIT_PCI.
Initializes CMOS date (2).
Initializes PnP.
Sets setting up item.
Sets power off enable.
Clears wakeup conditions.
Controls CPU speed.
Control panel opening/closing
Initializes PC card slot.
F109 Raises task waiting for the completion of PnP resource.
Initializes H/W-related to PnP.
Auto-configuration of PCI
Generates work for auto-configuration.
Configuration
Restores the result of VGA configuration.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-25
Table 2-5 Debugging port status (6/7)
D port
status Contents
F10Ah Raises the task waiting for the completion of PCI_configuration.
Initializes H/W necessary after PCI configuration.
Enables power off.
Generates out put code.
F10Bh FIRST_64KB_CHECK (Memory checks of first 64KB)
F10Ch INIT_INT_VECTOR (Initialization of vector)
F10Dh INIT_NDP(Initialization of NDP)
F10Eh INIT_SYSTEM (Initialization of system)
Stores CMOS error status into IRT_ERR_STS_BUF.
Starts initializing of TIMER.
Initializes buffer for power save.
Initializes EC and reads battery information.
Renews system BIOS. (Renews model name, EDID information for LCD.)
F10Fh INIT_Display (Waiting for completion of initializing VGA chip and initializing
BIOS)
F110h DISP_LOGO (Display of LOGO)
F111h SYS_MEM_CHECK (Memory check of conventional memory)
F112h EXT_MEM_CHECK (Exception check in protect mode)
F114h Initializes conventional memory.
F115h CHK_DMA_PAGE(Check of DMA Page Register)
F116h CHECK_DMAC(Check of DMAC)
F117h INIT_DMAC (Initialization of DMA)
F118h BOOT_PASSWORD (Password check)
Waits for completion of initializing HDD
Checks key input during IRT. (waits here the completion of KBC
initialization.)
Initializes ATA priority.
Clears security buffer.
F11Bh EX_IO_ROM_CHECK (Check of optional I/O ROM)
F11Ch PRE_BOOT_SETUP
Stores the value of 40:00h.(for saving/restoring SIO)
Sets font address for resume password.
Sets the repeat parameter to USB KB.
Gets the key information pressed during IRT.
Stores T_SHADOW_RAM_SIZE.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2-26 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table 2-5 Debugging port status (7/7)
D port
status Contents
F11Ch Renews system resources right before Boot.
Rewrites memory map of INT15h E820h function.
Renews tables for DMI.
Copies ACPI table to the top of expansion memory.
Waits for the completion of writing PSC version to BIOS.
Waits for the completion of setting clock generator. When any error, halts at
DEBUG
PORT=1EH.
Releases NMI Mask.
Checksums TIT.
Clears flag during IRT of Runtime side.
Renews checksum of Runtime side.
Initializes Bluetooth.
Checks upgrade of CPU, HDD and others.
Checks for the maintenance card.
Prohibits PC card not used.
Sets the WAKEUP status data for ACPI.
Initializes the HW right before BOOT and waits for the completion.
Sets battery save mode.
Sets date.
Waits for the completion of initializing AC-Link.
Renews DMI Wakeup factor and SM-BIOS structure table.
Closes configuration area for PCI device.
Cache control
Process related to CPU
Erases the information HW-reset from EC.
Renews parameter block A.
Makes the CPU clock set up by SETUP.
Waits for motor-off of HDD disable.
After process of PRE_BOOT_SETUP
Clears PWRBTN_STS.
Sets Power Button to “disable”.
Clears PME_EN of built-in LAN.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-27
Procedure 3 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the following tests form Diagnostic Program. These tests check the system board and
I/O unit. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostic, for more information on how to perform
these tests.
1. System test
2. Memory test
3. Keyboard test
4. Display test
5. Floppy Disk test
6. Hard Disk test
7. Real Timer test
8. NDP test
9. Expansion test
10. CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test
11. Wireless LAN test
12. Sound test
13. LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 4.
Procedure 4 Replacement Check
The system board connectors may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform Check 1.
Check 1 Visually check for the following:
a) Cracked or broken connector housing
b) Damaged connector pins
If connectors are in good condition, but there is still a problem, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2-28 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the USB 3.5” FDD is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: FDD Head Cleaning Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1 FDD Head Cleaning Check
FDD head cleaning is one option available in the Diagnostic Program.
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the floppy disk drive of the computer, turn on the computer and
run the test. And then clean the FDD heads using the cleaning kit. If the FDD still does not
function properly after cleaning, go to Procedure 2.
Detailed operation is given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.
If the test program cannot be executed on the computer, go to Procedure 3.
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-29
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the FDD of the computer, turn on the computer and run the test.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test
procedures.
Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled.
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-6. If any other
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.
Table 2-6 FDD error code and status
Code Status
01h Bad command
02h Address mark not found
03h Write protected
04h Record not found
06h Media replaced
08h DMA overrun error
09h DMA boundary error
10h CRC error
20h FDC error
40h Seek error
60h FDD not drive
80h Time out error (Not ready)
EEh Write buffer error
Check 1 If the following message is displayed, disable the write protect tab on the floppy
disk by sliding the write protect tab to “write enable”. If any other message appears,
perform Check 2.
Write protected
Check 2 Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2-30 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The USB FDD connector may be disconnected from the system board. Check visually that the
connector is connected firmly.
Check 1 Make sure the USB FDD cable is firmly connected to the USB port 0,1 or 2.
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2. If
there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The USB FDD may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the
FDD is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the system board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-31
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the 2.5” HDD is functioning properly. Perform the
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Partition Check
Procedure 3: Format Check
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Caution: The contents of the 2.5” hard disk will be erased when the HDD
troubleshooting procedures are executed. Transfer the contents of the hard disk
to floppy disks or other storage drive(s). For the backup, refer to the User’s
Manual.
Procedure 1 Message Check
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. When the test detects an error, an error message is displayed on the screen.
Make sure of no floppy disk in the FDD. Turn on the computer and check the message on the
screen. When an OS starts from the 2.5” HDD, go to Procedure 3. Otherwise, start with Check
1 below and perform the other checks as instructed.
Check 1 If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.
HDC ERROR
or
HDD #X ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
Check 2 If either of the following messages appears, go to Check 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 5.
Insert system disk in drive
Press any key when ready .....
or
Non-System disk or disk error
Replace and press any key when ready
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2-32 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Check 3 Check SETUP to see whether the Hard Disk option is set to Not used. If it is set to
Not used, choose another setting and return to Check 1. If it is not set to Not used,
go to procedure 2.
Procedure 2 Partition Check
Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and start the computer. Perform the following
checks:
Check 1 Type C: and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you
can change to drive C, go to Procedure 2.
Check 2 Type FDISK and press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed in the Display Partition Information, go to Check
3. If drive C is not listed, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to
create a DOS partition or a logical DOS drive on drive C. If the problem still exists,
go to Procedure 2.
Check 3 If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active
partition for drive C. Then go to Procedure 2.
Check 4 Remove the system disk from the FDD and reboot the computer. If the problem
still exists, go to Procedure 2. Otherwise, the HDD is operating normally.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-33
Procedure 3 Format Check
The computer’s 2.5" HDD is formatted using the MS-DOS FORMAT program or the physical
format program of the test program. To format the 2.5" HDD, start with Check 1 below and
perform the other steps as required.
Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for the operation of MS-DOS. For the format by the test
program, refer to the Chapter 3.
Check 1 Format the 2.5" HDD using MS-DOS FORMAT command. Type as FORMAT
C:/S/U.
If the 2.5" HDD can not be formatted, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Using the MS-DOS FDISK command, set the 2.5" HDD partition. If the partition
is not set, go to Check 3. If it is set, format the 2.5" HDD using MS-DOS
FORMAT command.
Check 3 Using the Diagnostic Disk, format the 2.5" HDD with a format option (physical
format). If the 2.5" HDD is formatted, set the 2.5" HDD partition using MS-DOS
FDISK command.
If you cannot format the 2.5" HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to
Procedure 4.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2-34 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Procedure 4 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about
the HDD test program.
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed. The
error codes and statuses are described in Table 2-7. If an error code is not displayed but the
problem still exists, go to Procedure 5.
Table 2-7 2.5” HDD error code and status
Code Status
01h Bad command
02h Address mark not found
04h Record not found
05h HDC not reset
07h Drive not initialized
08h HDC overrun error (DRQ)
09h DMA boundary error
0Ah Bad sector error
0Bh Bad track error
10h ECC error
11h ECC recover enable
12h DMA CRC error
20h HDC error
40h Seek error
80h Time out error
AAh Drive not ready
BBh Undefined error
CCh Write fault
E0h Status error
EEh Access time out error
DAh No HDD
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-35
Procedure 5 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The HDD is connected to the connector PJ1800 of the system board. The connecting portion
may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks to check the connecting portion:
Check 1 Make sure the HDD is firmly connected to the system board.
If connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 4. If there is still an
error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The 2.5" HDD may be damaged. Replace it with a new one and check the
operation. If the problem still exists, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.7 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
2-36 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.7 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
To check if the optical drive is defective or malfunctioning, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests
and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The optical drive is connected to the system board by the connector. The connector may be
disconnected from the system board or faulty. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4 and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the following connector PJ1801 has been firmly connected to the
optical drive and the system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect it firmly and return to Procedure 1. If there is
still an error, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The optical drive may be faulty. Replace the optical drive with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4. If the optical drive is still not functioning
properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be faulty. Replace it with new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4.
2.8 Display Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-37
2.8 Display Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s display is functioning properly.
Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.
Procedure 1: External Monitor Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Cable Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
Procedure 1 External Monitor Check
Connect an external monitor and tun on the computer. If there is no problem on it, the internal
LCD may be defective. Go to Procedure 3. If there is any problem on the external monitor, the
system board may be defective. Go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The Display Test program is stored on the Diagnostics disk. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the
computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests
and Diagnostics for details.
This program checks the display controller on the system board. If an error is detected, go to
Procedure 3.
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Cable Check
The LCD Module is connected to the system board by an LCD/FL cable. The FL inverter
board is also connected to the system board by an LCD/FL cable. The connectors may be
disconnected from the system board or may be damaged. Disassemble the computer following
the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.8 Display Troubleshooting
2-38 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If there is still an error,
go to Procedure 4.
Procedure 4 Replacement Check
Units related to display are a FL inverter board, Display module, System board and LCD/FL
cable. Any of the components may be damaged. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, then perform the following checks:
(1) If the FL does not light, perform Check 1.
(2) If characters are displayed on the internal display but the display is not normal, perform
Check 3.
(3) If the FL lights even if the display cover is closed, perform Check 4.
Check 1 The LCD/FL cable may be damaged. Replace the cable with a new one. If there is
still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The FL inverter board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one and repeat
Procedure 1. If there is still an error, go to Check 3.
Check 3 The LCD module may be damaged. Replace it with a new one and repeat
Procedure 1. If there is still an error, go to Check 4.
Check 4 The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one.
2.9 Keyboard Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-39
2.9 Keyboard Troubleshooting
To determine if the computer’s keyboard is functioning properly, perform the following
procedures. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Keyboard Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, the keyboard is functioning
properly.
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The keyboard or system board may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the
following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the keyboard cable is firmly connected to the connector PJ3230 on the
system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The keyboard may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.10 Touch Pad Troubleshooting
2-40 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.10 Touch Pad Troubleshooting
To determine whether the Touch Pad is faulty or not, perform the following procedures:
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the touch pad test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.
If any error is detected, perform Procedure 2. The pointing device is operating normally if no
error is detected.
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The touch pad is connected to the system board with a flexible cable. This cable may have
come off the connector or the connector may have come off the system board. Disassemble
the computer and check the cable connections. See Chapter 4 for the disassembly procedure.
Check 1 Make sure the touch pad cable is securely connected to the connector PJ3240 on
the system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The touch pad or PAD switch cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem
still exists, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2.11 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-41
2.11 SD Card Slot Troubleshooting
To check if the SD card slot is good or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures below as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Check on Windows XP
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Check on Windows XP
Insert the SD card into the slot. Check if the installed Windows recognizes automatically the
SD card and the data in the SD card can be read.
If the card is not recognized or data are not read, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The SD card is connected to the connector PJ2130 of the system board.
Check 1 The SD card and the system board may be disconnected. Make sure the SD card is
firmly inserted to the PJ2130 of the system board. If the SD card is still not
functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The SD card may be faulty. Replace it. If the problem continues, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.12 Modem Troubleshooting
2-42 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.12 Modem Troubleshooting
To check if the modem is defective or malfunctioning, follow the troubleshooting procedures
below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Modem test program available as part of the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394
test program. This program checks the modem. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for
more information on how to perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The Modem jack and MDC board is connected to the system board. If the modem
malfunctions, these connections may be bad or the MDC or system board might be faulty.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and perform the
following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the MDC is firmly connected to the PJ3010 on System board and the
MDC cable is firmly connected to the PJ3011 on the system board.
If any connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and return to Procedure 1. If
there is still an error, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The MDC cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the modem is not still
working properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The MDC may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in Chapter
4. If the modem is not still working properly, perform Check 4.
2.12 Modem Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-43
Check 4 The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.13 LAN Troubleshooting
2-44 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.13 LAN Troubleshooting
To check if the computer’s LAN is defective or malfunctioning, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the LAN test program available as part of the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform
the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check
The LAN function is installed on the system board. The LAN jack is connected to the system
board. If the LAN malfunctions, the system board might be faulty.
Replace the system board with a new one following the steps described in Chapter 4.
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-45
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
To check if the sound function is defective or malfunctioning, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Sound test program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more
information on how to perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
2-46 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Procedure 2 Connector Check
The speaker, external microphone, internal microphone and headphone are connected to the
connectors on the system board and SD board shown in the following figure.
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks:
If the stereo speakers do not work correctly, perform Check 1.
If headphones do not work correctly, perform Check 2.
If sound recording by an external microphone does not work correctly, perform Check 3.
If sound recording by an internal microphone does not work correctly, perform Check 4.
Check 1 If the stereo speakers do not work properly, the speaker cables may be
disconnected. Make sure the speaker cables are firmly connected to PJ6003 on the
system board. If the stereo speakers are still not functioning properly, go to
Procedure 3.
Check 2 If headphones do not work properly, the SD board may be disconnected or the
headphone cable may be disconnected. Make sure the SD board is firmly
connected to PJ9550 on the system board and the headphone cable is connected to
the headphone jack PJ6002 on the SD board. If the sound function still does not
work properly, go to Procedure 3.
Check 3 If the sound recording function by an external microphone does not work properly,
the SD board may be disconnected or the external microphone cable may be
disconnected. Make sure the SD board is firmly connected to the connector PJ9550
on the system board and the external microphone cable is firmly connected to
microphone jack PJ6001 on the SD board. If recording is still not functioning
properly, go to Procedure 3.
Check 4 If the sound recording function by the internal microphone does not work properly,
the SD board may be disconnected or the internal microphone cable may be
disconnected. Make sure the SD board is firmly connected to the connector PJ9550
on the system board and the internal microphone cable is firmly connected to the
connector PJ6000 on the SD board. If recording is still not functioning properly, go
to Procedure 3.
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-47
Procedure 3 Replacement Check
Check 1 If the stereo speakers do not sound properly, the stereo speakers may be defective
or damaged. Replace them with new ones. If the stereo speakers still do not work
properly, go to Check 5.
Check 2 If headphones do not sound properly, the SD board may be defective. Replace the
SD board with a new one. If the headphone still does not work properly, go to
Check 5.
Check 3 If the recording function by the external microphone does not work properly, the
SD board may be defective. Replace the SD board with a new one. If the recording
function still does not work properly, go to Check 5.
Check 4 If the recording function by the internal microphone does not work properly, the
SD board may be defective. Replace the SD board with a new one. If the recording
function still does not work properly, go to Check 5.
Check 5 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures 2.15 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
2-48 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2.15 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
To check if the Wireless LAN is good or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures below as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antenna Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1 Transmitting-Receiving Check
Make sure the wireless communication switch on the computer is turned ON. If it is not, turn
ON.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test
program.
Check 1 Execute test program for the wireless LAN function to check the transmitting-
receiving function of the wireless LAN. You will need a second computer that can
communicate by the wireless LAN.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working.
If the computer does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.
2.15 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 2-49
Procedure 2 Antenna Connection Check
The wireless LAN function wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the wireless communication switch is “On”.
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the wireless LAN is still not functioning
properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The wireless LAN board and the system board may be disconnected. Make sure
the wireless LAN board is firmly connected to the PJ2200 of the system board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect firmly and return to Procedure 1. If there
is still an error, go to Check 3.
Check 3 Make sure the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) are firmly connected
to the Wireless LAN board. If the antenna cables are disconnected, connect them
firmly then return to Procedure 1. If there is still an error, perform Procedure 3.
Procedure 3 Replacement Check
The wireless LAN board, wireless LAN antenna or the system board may be defective.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and perform the
following checks.
Check 1 The wireless LAN board may be defective or damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4 and replace the board with a new one. If
there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The wireless LAN antenna may be defective or damaged. Disassemble the
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and replace the board with a
new one. If there is still an error, go to Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be defective or damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4 and replace the board with a new one.
Chapter 3
Tests and Diagnostics
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3-ii PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3
3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-iii
Chapter 3 Contents
3.1 The Diagnostic Test...................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Diagnostics menu .................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool..................................3-3
3.1.3 Heatrun test program............................................................................3-3
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test ...................................................................................3-4
3.2.1 Diagnostics menu (T&D).....................................................................3-4
3.2.2 H/W initial information setting tool.....................................................3-7
3.2.3 Heatrun test program............................................................................3-7
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration........................................................................3-8
3.4 Heatrun Test.............................................................................................................3-11
3.5 Subtest Names..........................................................................................................3-12
3.6 System Test..............................................................................................................3-14
3.7 Memory Test............................................................................................................3-16
3.8 Keyboard Test..........................................................................................................3-17
3.9 Display Test .............................................................................................................3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test......................................................................................................3-21
3.11 Printer Test...............................................................................................................3-23
3.12 Async Test................................................................................................................3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test.........................................................................................................3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................3-29
3.15 NDP Test..................................................................................................................3-31
3.16 Expansion Test.........................................................................................................3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test .....................................................................................3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names.........................................................................3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status....................................................................................3-38
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST...................................................................................................3-40
3.20.1 Program Description...........................................................................3-40
3.20.2 Operations...........................................................................................3-40
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3-iv PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.21 Head Cleaning..........................................................................................................3-46
3.21.1 Function Description..........................................................................3-46
3.21.2 Operations...........................................................................................3-46
3.22 Log Utilities .............................................................................................................3-47
3.22.1 Function Description..........................................................................3-47
3.22.2 Operations...........................................................................................3-48
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................3-49
3.23.1 Function Description..........................................................................3-49
3.23.2 Operations...........................................................................................3-49
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities......................................................................................3-50
3.24.1 Function Description..........................................................................3-50
3.24.2 Operations...........................................................................................3-51
3.25 System Configuration..............................................................................................3-55
3.25.1 Function Description..........................................................................3-55
3.25.2 Operations...........................................................................................3-56
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g).........................................................3-57
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)............................................................3-61
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program ..................................................3-65
3.28.1 LAN test .............................................................................................3-65
3.28.2 Modem test .........................................................................................3-68
3.28.3 Bluetooth test......................................................................................3-69
3.28.4 IEEE1394 test.....................................................................................3-78
3.29 Sound Test program.................................................................................................3-79
3.29.1 Sound (Standard) test .........................................................................3-79
3.29.2 Sound (Legacy) test............................................................................3-81
3.29.3 CD Sound (Standard) test...................................................................3-82
3.30 SETUP .....................................................................................................................3-85
3.29.1 Function Description..........................................................................3-85
3.29.2 Accessing the SETUP Program..........................................................3-86
3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-v
Tables
Table 3-1 Subtest names ....................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names ....................................................................3-35
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents......................................................3-38
Table 3-4 Error register contents........................................................................................3-39
Table 3-5 Error message....................................................................................................3-71
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) .......................................................3-72
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT)....................................3-76
Table 3-8 Lamp pattern of power button............................................................................3-95
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3-vi PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.1 The Diagnostic Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-1
3
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
This chapter explains how to use the Diagnostic Test programs to test the functions of the
computer’s hardware modules. The Diagnostics Programs are stored on some Diagnostic Disks.
There are Service Program Modules (DIAGNOSTIC MENU) and the Test Program Modules
(DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU) on the Diagnostic Disk.
The Hardware Initial information Setting Tool consists of some programs which write the hardware
information or displays the current information of the computer. It is also included in one of
Diagnostic Disks.
The heatrun test is automatic test program which executes the some tests successively.
Note: Before starting the diagnostics, be sure to follow these steps:
1. Check all cables are connected firmly.
2. Exit any application and close Windows.
3. Check if [All Devices] is selected in the “Device Config.” in SETUP menu.
3.1.1 Diagnostics menu
The DIAGNOSTIC MENU consists of the following functions.
? DIAGNOSTIC TEST
? ONLY ONE TEST
? HEAD CLEANING
? LOG UTILITIES
? RUNNING TEST
? FDD UTILITIES
? SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
? EXIT TO MS-DOS
The DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU contains the following functional tests:
? SYSTEM TEST
? MEMORY TEST
? KEYBOARD TEST
? DISPLAY TEST
? FLOPPY DISK TEST
? PRINTER TEST
? ASYNC TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
? HARD DISK TEST
? REAL TIMER TEST
? NDP TEST
? EXPANSION TEST
? CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
Other tests are:
? Wireless LAN TEST (Wireless LAN TEST disk)
? LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST (LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST disk)
? Sound TEST (Sound TEST disk)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the Diagnostic test programs.
? The Diagnostic Disks (T&D for maintenance for Main, LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394,
wireless LAN and Sound)
? A formatted working disk (Floppy disk test)
? USB FDD (for all tests)
? A USB test module (USB test )
? A USB cable (USB test)
? An external CRT monitor (Expansion test)
? A CD test media TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK or ABEX TEST CD-ROM (Sound
test)
? A DVD test media (DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1) (Sound test)
? A music CD (Sound test)
? A store-bought CD-RW media (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)
? A microphone (Sound test)
? Headphones (Sound test)
? A cleaning kit to clean the floppy disk drive heads (Head Cleaning)
? An exclusive modem test jig (Nitto Electric Manufacture Co.,Ltd-made QE2000P01)
(Modem test)
? A module cable and RJ11 connector checker (Modem test)
? A LAN wraparound connector (LAN test)
? PC card wraparound connector (Expansion test)
? A display with monitor ID function (Expansion test)
? RS232C wraparound connector (Async test)
? A PC for wraparound test (Wireless LAN test/Bluetooth test/IEEE1394 test)
3.1 The Diagnostic Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-3
3.1.2 H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool
The H/W initial information setting tool consists of the following programs.
? Initial configuration
? Region write
? System configuration display
? E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the programs.
? The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
3.1.3 Heatrun test program
The heatrun test starts automatically after the selection.
You will need the following equipment to perform this program.
? The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
To start the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM, follow these steps:
1. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the floppy disk drive.
2. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the USB floppy disk drive and turn on the computer while
pressing U key. Then, press Enter and the following menu appears.
Microsoft Windows XX Startup Menu
---------------------------------------------------------
1. Repair Main (T&D)
2. Repair initial config set
3. Repair Heatrun (T&D)
Enter a choice: 1
To start the Diagnostics menu (T&D), press 1 and Enter.
To start the H/W initial information setting tool, press 2 and Enter.
To start the Heatrun test, press 3 and Enter.
Note: After replacing the system board or CPU, it is necessary to execute the subtest
01 Initial configuration in 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration.
3.2.1 Diagnostics menu (T&D)
To execute this program, select 1- Repair Main (T&D) in the startup menu, press Enter.
The following menu appears.
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTICS MENU :
1 - DIAGNOSTIC TEST
2 – ONLY ONE TEST
3 -
4 - HEAD CLEANING
5 - LOG UTILITIES
6 - RUNNING TEST
7 - FDD UTILITIES
8 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
9 - EXIT TO MS-DOS
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-5
Note: To exit the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press the Esc key. If a test program is
in progress, press Ctrl + Break to exit the test program. If a test program is in
progress, press Ctrl + C to stop the test program.
Set the highlight bar to 1, and press Enter. The following DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU will
appear:
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU :
1 - SYSTEM TEST
2 - MEMORY TEST
3 - KEYBOARD TEST
4 - DISPLAY TEST
5 - FLOPPY DISK TEST
6 - PRINTER TEST [It is not supported]
7 – ASYNC TEST [It is not supported]
8 - HARD DISK TEST [There is a second hard disk]
9 - REAL TIMER TEST
10 - NDP TEST
11 - EXPANSION TEST
12 - CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
88 - ERROR RETRY COUNT SET [FDD & HDD]
99 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
Functions 1 through 12 are the Diagnostic Tests. Function 88 sets the floppy disk drive and
hard disk drive error retry count (0-255).
To exit the submenu of the Diagnostic Test and returns to the Diagnostics Menu, set the
highlight bar to function 99 and press Enter.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Select the option you want to execute and press Enter. When you select 1- SYSTEM TEST,
the following message will appear:
SYSTEM TEST NAME XXXXXX
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
[Ctrl]+[C] ; key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX READ DATA : XX
ADDRESS : XXXXXX STATUS : XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - ROM checksum
02 – Fan ON/OFF
03 - Geyserville
04 - Quick charge
05 - DMI read
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
Note: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
Select the desired subtest number from the subtest menu and press Enter. The following message
will appear:
TEST LOOP : YES (or NO)
ERROR STOP : YES (or NO)
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option.
Selecting YES of TEST LOOP increases the pass counter by one, each time the test cycle ends
and restarts the test cycle.
Selecting NO returns the process to the subtest menu after the test is complete.
Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to “ERROR STOP”.
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-7
Selecting YES of ERROR STOP stops the test program when an error is found and displays the
operation guide on the right side of the display screen as shown below:
ERROR STATUS NAME [[ HALT OPERATION ]]
1: Test end
2: Continue
3: Retry
These three selections have the following functions respectively:
1. Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.
2. Continues the test.
3. Restarts the test from the error.
Selecting NO keeps the test running even if an error is found. When an error occurred, the error
status is displayed and one error is added to the error counter.
Table 3-1 in section 3.5 describes the function of each test on the subtest menu. Table 3-2 in
section 3.18 describes the error codes and error status for each error.
Details of tests in DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU are described on and after section 3.6. As for
other service programs, refer to section 3.20 to 3.25
3.2.2 H/W initial information setting tool
After selecting this test, the following menu appears in the display.
##################################################################
######## H/W initial information setting tool VX.XX
#######
##################################################################
#
* 1 ………………………… Initial configuration *
* 2 ………………………… Region write *
* 8 ………………………… System configuration display
*
* 9 ………………………… E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI) *
******************************************************************
*
... Press test number [1,2,8,9] ?
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.3.
3.2.3 Heatrun test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3-8 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
After selecting this test, the heatrun test starts executing the same subtest as 3.23 RUNNING
TEST.
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.4.
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-9
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
To execute this program, select 2-Repair initial config test in the startup menu,
press Enter and follow the directions on the screen. The H/W initial information setting tool
consists of four subtests. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press
Enter.
Subtest 01 Initial configuration
This subtest executes the following items and shows their contents in the display.
When an item ends normally, the program proceeds automatically to the next one.
When an error is found, the program stops and waits for key input. (After solving
the problem, the program executes the item again.)
Setting of the CPU set table
Setting of the micro code
Setting of the EHSS
Inputting and writing of DMI information
When the DMI information is displayed, the following messages appear
in order. Input each information. (If you do not replace the PCB, the DMI
information should not be changed.)
1. “Enter Model Name ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
model name and press Enter. (e.g. DynaBook)
2. “Enter Version Number ?” is displayed. Input the
computer’s version number and press Enter. (e.g. PC18070C313S)
3. “Enter Serial Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
serial number and press Enter. (e.g. 12345678)
4. “Enter Model Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
sales model number and press Enter. (e.g. PP200-AAAAA)
5. “Enter Bundle Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
PCN/Bundle number and press Enter.
(e.g. PMSREQ3Q34H/S0123456789)
6. “Write data OK (Y/N) ?” is displayed. To write the DMI
information to the Flash ROM, press Y, and then Enter.
7. “Create DMIINFO TXT (Y/N) ?” is displayed. Press Y, then
the DMI information (text data) is written to the Floppy disk, etc.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
3-10 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
? Setting of the HWSC
? Setting of the UUID
? Display of the DMI information (including UUID)
? Setting of DVD region code (Yes/No)
After completion of the above settings, H/W configuration & DMI information
are appeared in order. Check the contents and press Enter.
Subtest 02 Region write
This subtest executes the setting of the region code for DVD drive based on the
destination of the machine.
When the region code is already written, test ends without setting.
The following message appears in the display after setting the region code.
Press any key to return to the H/W initial information setting tool menu.
***********************************
******* It completed *******
***********************************
* *
Press any key to continue...
Subtest 03 DMI information save
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after replacing.
This subtest saves all the DMI data in a floppy disk.
Subtest 04 DMI information recovery
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after replacing.
This subtest writes all the DMI data in the floppy disk into the new PCB.
Note: Since the data of UUID is updated every time when this subtest, DMI information
recovery, is done, the saved UUID data is not written.
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-11
Subtest 08 System configuration display
This subtest displays the information of the system configuration.
When the following message appears, confirm the contents and press Enter.
Press [Enter] key
For more details on the system configuration information, refer to “3.25 System
configuration”.
Subtest 09 E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
It checks whether the MAC address, GUID of IEEE1394 and DMI
information are written.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.4 Heatrun Test
3-12 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.4 Heatrun Test
To execute this program, select 3-Repair heatrun in the startup menu, press Enter.
After selecting this test, the same subtests as 3.23 Running Test are executed successively.
For more details on the procedure and test content, refer to Running Test.
When the heatrun test ends, following message appears in the display.
************************************************
HEATRUN TEST END
************************************************
Press any key to continue...
Press any key and return to the startup menu.
Note: The test result (Errorlog.txt) is stored in the floppy disk. The result is displayed in
the same format as Log Utilities. For more details of the format, refer to 3.22
Log Utilities.
3.5 Subtest Names 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-13
3.5 Subtest Names
Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU.
Table 3-1 Subtest names (1/2)
No. Test Name Subtest No. Subtest Name
1 SYSTEM 01
02
03
04
05
ROM checksum
Fan ON/OFF
Geyserville
Quick charge
DMI read
2 MEMORY 01
02
03
04
05
Conventional memory
Protected Mode
Protected Mode (cache off)
Cache memory (on/off)
Stress
3 KEYBOARD 01 Pressed key code display
4 DISPLAY 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
VRAM read/write for VGA
Gradation for VGA
Gradation for LCD
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
All dot on/off for LCD
“H” pattern display
LCD Brightness
5 FLOPPY DISK 01
02
03
04
05
Sequential read
Sequential read/write
Random address/data
Write specified address
Read specified address
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.5 Subtest Names
3-14 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table 3-1 Subtest names (2/2)
No. Test Name Subtest No. Subtest Name
6 PRINTER
[Not supported]
01
02
03
Ripple pattern
Function
Wraparound
7 ASYNC
[Not supported]
01
02
03
FIR/SIR Point to point (send)
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)
Wraparound (board)
8 HARD DISK 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Sequential read
Address uniqueness
Random address/data
Cross talk & peak shift
Partial Read
Write specified address
Read specified address
Sequential write
W-R-C specified address
9 REAL TIMER 01
02
03
Real time
Backup memory
Real time carry
10 NDP 01 NDP
11 EXPANSION 01
03
PCMCIA wraparound [Not supported]
RGB monitor ID
13 CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM 01
02
03
04
Sequential read
Read specified address
Random address/data
RW 1point W/R/C
3.6 System Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-15
3.6 System Test
To execute the System Test, select 1 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01 ROM Checksum
This subtest executes a checksum test of the BIOS ROM (range: F0000h to
FFFFFh, 64KB) on the System Board.
Subtest 02 Fan ON/OFF
This subtest turns on/off the fan motor by force with Fan ON/OFF commands.
The following message will appear.
Fan number select (1;FAN#1, 2;FAN#2, 0; FAN#1&#2) ?
To check the CPU fan, press 1 and Enter.
To check the VGA fan, press 2 and Enter.
To check both CPU fan and VGA fan, press 0 and Enter.
The following message will appear.
Fan test execute now ... (CPU:xxxxRpm / GPU:xxxxRpm)
*** Test Fan Revolution 0000RPM start
Make sure the specified fan does not rotate and the message of fan revolution for it
is “0000Rpm”. Then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution Low speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at low speed and the message of fan revolution for it
changes. Then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution High speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at high speed and the message of fan revolution for it
changes. Then press Enter.
After a while, the fan rotating will stop.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.6 System Test
3-16 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Note: The Fan ON/OFF test for GPU fan is not supported in this model.
Subtest 03 Geyserville
If the CPU supports Gerserville (SpeedStep), this Subtest checks that the CPU
operating clock speed can be changed.
Subtest 04 Quick Charge
This subtest checks the status for the quick charge.
Subtest 05 DMI read
This subtest displays the information in the Flash-ROM in the following format.
*** DMI Data Display Ver X.XX ***
Model Name : XXXXXXXXXXX
Version Number : XXXXXXXXXXXX
Serial Number : XXXXXXXX
Model Number : XXXXXX-XXXXX
UUID Number : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Press [Enter] to EXIT
To exit this subtest and return to the SYSTEM test menu, press Enter.
3.7 Memory Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-17
3.7 Memory Test
To execute the Memory Test, select 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01 Conventional memory
This subtest writes a constant data to conventional memory (0 to 640 KB), then
reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 02 Protected Mode
Note: The CONFIG.SYS file must be configured without expanded memory manager
programs such as EMM386.EXE, EMM386.SYS or QEMM386.SYS. Also, the
HIMEM.SYS must be deleted from the CONFIG.SYS file.
This subtest writes constant data and address data (from 1MB to maximum MB),
and reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 03 Protected Mode (Cache off)
This subtest executes the same way as the subtest 02 with the cache off.
Subtest 04 Cache Memory (on/off)
To test the cache memory, a pass-through write-read comparison of ‘5Ah’ data is
run repeatedly to the test area (‘7000’: ‘Program’ size to ‘7000’: ‘7FFF’ (32 KB))
to check the hit-miss ratio (on/off status) for CPU cache memory. One test takes 3
seconds.
Number of misses ? Number of hits ? OK
Number of misses ? Number of hits ? Fail
Subtest 05 Stress
Data (from 1MB to the maximum MB) is written from the 16KB write buffer to the
16KB read buffer and compared the data in the buffers. The read buffer starts from
0001 and the comparison is continued with the following read buffer addresses:
0001, 0003, 0005, 0007, 0009, 000b, 000d and 000f.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.8 Keyboard Test
3-18 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.8 Keyboard Test
To execute the Keyboard Test, select 3 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01 Pressed key code display
When a key is pressed, the scan code, character code, and key top name are
displayed on the screen in the format shown below. The Ins Lock, Caps Lock,
Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Alt, Ctrl, Left Shift, and Right Shift keys are
displayed in reverse screen mode when pressed. The scan codes, character codes,
and key top names are shown in Appendix D.
KEYBOARD TEST IN PROGRESS 302000
Scan code =
Character code =
Keytop =
Ins Lock Caps Lock Num Lock Scroll Lock
Alt Ctrl Left Shift Right Shift
PRESS [Enter] KEY
3.9 Display Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-19
3.9 Display Test
To execute the Display Test, select 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01 VRAM read/write for VGA
This subtest writes the constant data (AAh and 55h) to the video RAM. The data is
read and compared to the original data.
Subtest 02 Gradation for VGA
This subtest displays four colors: red, green, blue and white from left to right across
the screen from black to maximum brightness. The display below appears on the
screen, when this subtest is executed.
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
Subtest 03 Gradation for LCD
This subtest displays bands of gradations for mixed colors, then for red, green, and
blue. Next, it displays eight solid colors full screen: red, semi-red, green, semi-
green, blue, semi-blue, white, and semi-white. Each color displays for three
seconds.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.9 Display Test
3-20 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Subtest 04 Gradation & Mode test for VGA
This subtest displays gradations for following modes. To change the mode, press
Enter.
[Mode 12]
[Mode 13]
[Mode 3]
[Mode 111 640*480 64K]
[Mode 112 640*480 16M]
[Mode 114 800*600 64K]
[Mode 115 800*600 16M]
[Mode 117 1024*768 64K]
[Mode 118 1024*768 16M]
The display below appears on the screen when this subtest is executed.
(Display example: Mode 12)
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter after
displaying the Mode 118.
Subtest 05 All dot on/off for LCD
This subtest displays an all-white screen then an all-black screen. The display
changes automatically every three seconds and the screen returns to the DISPLAY
TEST menu.
3.9 Display Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-21
Subtest 06 “H” Pattern Display
This subtest displays a full screen of “H” patterns.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
Note: The last row may not be completely filled. This condition does not indicate on
error.
Subtest 07 LCD Brightness
The LCD brightness changes in the following order:
Super-Bright ? Bright ? Semi-Bright ? Bright ? Super-Bright
After displaying with Super-Bright of LCD brightness, the screen returns to the
DISPLAY TEST menu.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.10 Floppy Disk Test
3-22 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
Caution: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove
the Diagnostics Disk and insert the work disk into the FDD because the
contents of the floppy disk will be erased.
To execute the Floppy Disk Test, select 5 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
1. The following message will appear. Select the media mode and start track to be tested and
press Enter.
Test start track (Enter:0/dd:00-79) ?
2. The Floppy Disk test contains five subtests that test the FDD.
The floppy disk test menu will appear after you select FDD test parameters.
FLOPPY DISK XXXXXXX XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C] : key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX READ DATA : XX
ADDRESS : XXXXXX STATUS : XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - Sequential read
02 - Sequential read/write
03 - Random address/data
04 - Write specified address
05 - Read specified address
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
3.10 Floppy Disk Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-23
Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following message
will appear during the floppy disk test.
FLOPPY DISK IN PROGRESS XXXXXXX
xxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C] : key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX READ DATA : XX
ADDRESS : XXXXXX STATUS : XXX
When the subtest 04 or 05 is selected, the following messages will appear on the screen. Select
the test data (subtest 04 only), track number and head number you want to test.
Test data ?? (subtest 04 only)
Track No. ??
Head No. ?
Subtest 01 Sequential read
This subtest performs a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that continuously reads
all the tracks (track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk.
Subtest 02 Sequential read/write
This subtest continuously writes data pattern B5ADADh to all the tracks (track: 0
to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the original
data.
Subtest 03 Random address/data
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks (track: 0 to 39/0
to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the original data.
Subtest 04 Write specified address
This subtest writes the data specified by an operator to a specified track, head, and
address.
Subtest 05 Read specified address
This subtest reads data from a track, head, and address specified by an operator.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.11 Printer Test
3-24 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.11 Printer Test
Caution: Printer Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Printer Test, select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
Note: An IBM compatible printer must be connected to the system to execute this test.
Also, printer port wraparound connector must be connected.
The following message will appear, after selecting the subtest 01 to 03 of the printer test:
channel#1 = XXXXh
channel#2 = XXXXh
channel#3 = XXXXh
Select the channel number (1-3) ?
The printer I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. The computer supports three
printer channels. Select the printer channel number, and press Enter to execute the selected
subtest.
Subtest 01 Ripple Pattern
This subtest prints characters for codes 20h through 7Eh line-by-line while shifting
one character to the left at the beginning of each new line.
3.11 Printer Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-25
Subtest 02 Function
This subtest is for IBM compatible printers, and tests the following functions:
Normal print
Double-width print
Compressed print
Emphasized print
Double-strike print
All characters print
This subtest prints the various print types shown below:
Subtest 03 Wraparound
Note: To execute this subtest, a printer wraparound connector must be connected to the
computer’s printer port.
This subtest checks the output and bi-directional modes of the data control and
status lines through the parallel port wraparound connector (34M741986G01).
(Both output and bi-directional modes are tested.)
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.12 Async Test
3-26 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.12 Async Test
Caution: Async Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Async Test, select 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions displayed on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01 and 02 require the following data format:
Method: Asynchronous
Speed: 38400BPS
Data: 8 bits and one parity bit (EVEN)
Data pattern: 20h to 7Eh
Subtest 01 FIR/SIR Point to point (send)
Note: To execute subtests 01 and 02, each computer must have access to the other
computer’s infrared port.
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the sent
data and compares it to the original data through the FIR/SIR port.
Subtest 02 FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)
This subtest is used with subtest 01 described above. This subtest receives the data
from the send side, then sends the received data through the FIR/SIR port.
Subtest 03 Wraparound (on board)
Note: To execute this subtest, a RS-232C wraparound connector must be connected to
the RS-232C port.
This subtest checks the data send/receive function through the wraparound
connector.
3.13 Hard Disk Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-27
3.13 Hard Disk Test
To execute the Hard Disk Test, select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter, and
follow the directions on the screen.
Caution: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when subtest 02, 03, 04, 06, 08
or 09 is executed. Before running the test, the customer should transfer the
contents of the hard disk to floppy disk or another hard disk. If the customer
has not or cannot perform the back-up, create back-up disks as described
below.
Check to see if the Microsoft Create System Disks Tools (MSCSD.EXE) still
exists in the System Tools Folder. (This tool can be used only once.) If it
exists, use it to back up the pre-installed software, then use the Backup
utility in the System Tools folder to back up the entire disk, including the
user’s files.
Refer to the operating system instructions.
1. The following message appears for the error dump operation when a data compare error is
detected. Select 1 or 2.
Data compare error dump (1:no, 2:yes)
2. The following message appears for whether or not the HDD status is displayed on the
screen. The HDC status is described in section 3.19. Select 1 or 2.
Detail status display (1:no, 2:yes)
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.13 Hard Disk Test
3-28 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3. The Hard Disk Test message will appear after you respond to the Detail Status prompt.
Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following
message will appear during each subtest.
HARD DISK TEST XXXXXXX XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C] : key stop
SUB TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX READ DATA : XX
ADDRESS : XXXXXX STATUS : XXX
The first three digits of the ADDRESS indicate which cylinder is being tested, the fourth
digit indicates the head number and the last two digits indicate the sector number.
The first digit of the STATUS indicates the drive being tested and the last two digits indicate
the error status code as explained in the table 3-2 of the section 3.18.
Subtest 01 Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of all the tracks on the HDD starting at track 0.
When all the tracks on the HDD have been read, the test starts at the maximum
track and reads the tracks on the HDD sequentially back to track 0.
Subtest 02 Address uniqueness
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-by-track.
The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the original data.
There are three ways the HDD can be read:
1. Forward sequential
2. Reverse sequential
3. Random
Subtest 03 Random address/data
This subtest writes random data in a random length to random addresses. This data
is then read and compared to the original data.
3.13 Hard Disk Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-29
Subtest 04 Cross talk & peak shift
This subtest writes eight types of worst pattern data (listed below) to a cylinder and
then reads the data while moving from cylinder to cylinder. (Tests the data
interference in the neighbor track.)
Worst pattern data Cylinder
‘B5ADAD’ 0 cylinder
‘4A5252’ 1 cylinder
‘EB6DB6’ 2 cylinder
‘149749’ 3 cylinder
’63B63B’ 4 cylinder
‘9C49C4’ 5 cylinder
‘2DB6DB’ 6 cylinder
‘D24974’ 7 cylinder
Subtest 05 Partial Read
This subtest reads 1GB data which is in minimum, middle and maximum address of
the HDD area.
Subtest 06 Write specified address
This subtest writes specified data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD.
Subtest 07 Read specified address
This subtest reads data, which has been written to a specified cylinder and head on
the HDD.
Subtest 08 Sequential write
This subtest writes specified 2-byte data to all of the cylinders on the HDD.
Subtest 09 W-R-C specified address
This subtest writes data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD, then reads
the data and compares it to the original data.
3.14 Real Timer Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-29
3
3.14 Real Timer Test
To execute the Real Timer Test, select 9 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and
press Enter.
Subtest 01 Real time
A new date and time can be input during this subtest. To execute the real time subtest,
follow these steps:
1. Select subtest 01 and the following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new date:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
2. If the current date is not correct, input the correct date at the “Enter new date”
prompt and press Enter.
3. The following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new time:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
4. If the current time is not correct, input the correct time in 24-hour format. To
enter “:”, press Shift + ;. The time is updated.
To exit the test, press Enter.
Subtest 02 Backup memory
This subtest checks the following backup memories:
Writes 1-bit of “on” data (01h through 80h) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes 1-bit of “off” data (FEh through 7Fh) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes the data pattern AAh and 55h to the address 0Eh to 7Fh
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.14 Real Timer Test
3-30 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Then the subtest reads and compares this data with the original data.
3.14 Real Timer Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-31
Subtest 03 Real time carry
Caution: When this subtest is executed, the current date and time are erased.
This subtest checks the real time clock increments, making sure the date and time are
displayed in the following format:
Current date : 12-31-1999
Current time : 23:59:58
The real time increments are automatically executed and the following is displayed:
Current date : 01-01-2000
Current time : 00:00:00
PRESS [Enter] KEY TO EXIT TEST
To exit the test, press Enter.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.15 NDP Test
3-32 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.15 NDP Test
To execute the NDP test, select 10 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01 NDP
This test checks the following functions of NDP:
? Control word
? Status word
? Bus
? Addition
? Multiplication
3.16 Expansion Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-33
3.16 Expansion Test
To execute the expansion test, select 11 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01 PCMCIA wraparound
Caution: PCMCIA wraparound test is not supported for this model.
Note: To execute this subtest, the PC card wraparound connector is required.
This subtest checks the following signal line of the PC card slot:
? Address line
? REG#, CE#1, CE#2 line
? Data line
? Speaker line
? Wait line
? BSY#, BVD1 line
This subtest is executed in the following order:
Sub# Address Good Bad Contents
01 00001
00001 nn
nn xx
xx Address line
REG#, CE#1, CE#2
nn=A0, 90, 80, 00
02 00002 ww rr Data line
ww=write data, rr=read data
03 00003 –– –– Speaker line
04 00004 40,80 xx Wait line (40<xx<80)
05 00005 nn xx Other lines (BSY#, BVD1)
NN=21, 00
Note: Select the subtest number01, The following message will appear:
Test slot number select (1:slot0, 2:slot1, 0:slot0&1)?
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.16 Expansion Test
3-34 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Subtest 02 RGB monitor ID
Note: To execute this subtest, an external monitor with monitor ID function is required.
Connect the external monitor to the PC for the test of ID acquisition.
The judgment of acquisition is based on the panel data. In simultaneous display
mode or internal display mode, in which the panel data is acquired, this subtest will
fail. Therefore, make sure only the external display is selected when executing this
subtest.
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-35
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test
To execute the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, select 13 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU,
press Enter and follow the directions on the screen.
Note: For the subtest 01, 02 and 03, use the TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK TDY-01 or
ABEX TEST CD-ROM TCDR-702 and DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1. For the
subtest 04, use a CD-RW on the market.
Subtest 01 Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of one-block units (2K bytes) of all the logical
addresses.
Subtest 02 Read specified address
This subtest reads one-block data from a specified address.
Subtest 03 Random address/data
This subtest reads one-block data and multi-block data from random addresses
200 times.
Subtest 04 RW 1point W/R/C
This subtest writes, reads and compares data at one point on a CD/RW media.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3-36 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-2 lists the error codes and error status names for the Diagnostic Test.
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (1/3)
Device name Error code Error status name
(Common) FF Data Compare Error
System 01
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
ROM - CHECKSUM ERROR
ROM - SERIAL ID WRITE ERROR
ROM - NOT SUPPORTED PS-SYSTEM
ROM - SENSING ERROR(AC-ADAPT)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(1st Batt)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(2nd Batt)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(1)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(2)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(3)
Memory 01
02
DD
RAM - PARITY ERROR
RAM - PROTECTED MODE NO CHANGE'
RAM - CACHE MEMORY ERROR
Keyboard
FE
FD
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
EF
ED
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR (FIRST)
USB - SET ADDRESS ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(Top 8B)
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR (Whole)
HUB - SET CONFIGURATION ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(DESCR.)
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(P ON)
HUB - GET STATUS ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(RESET)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE ERROR
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE1 ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(Enab.)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE2 ERROR
USB - OVER CURRENT ERROR
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR(SECOND)'
Display EE VRAM SIZE NOT SUPPORT
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-37
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (2/3)
Device name Error code Error status name
FDD 01
02
03
04
08
09
10
20
40
80
60
06
EE
FDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
FDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
FDD - WRITE PROTECTED
FDD - RECORD NOT FOUND
FDD - DMA OVERRUN ERROR
FDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
FDD - CRC ERROR
FDD - FDC ERROR
FDD - SEEK ERROR
FDD - TIME OUT ERROR
FDD - NOT DRIVE ERROR
FDD - MEDIA REMOVED
FDD - WRITE BUFFER ERROR
Printer 01
08
10
20
40
80
PRT - TIME OUT
PRT – FAULT
PRT - SELECT LINE
PRT - OUT OF PAPER
PRT - POWER OFF
PRT - BUSY LINE
ASYNC 01
02
04
08
10
20
40
80
88
05
06
RS232C - [DTR ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [CTS ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [RX READY] TIME OUT
RS232C - [TX FULL] TIME OUT
RS232C - PARITY ERROR
RS232C - FRAMING ERROR
RS232C - OVERRUN ERROR
RS232C - LINE STATUS ERROR
RS232C - MODEM STATUS ERROR
SIR - TIME OUT ERROR
FIR - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD 05
07
09
0B
BB
08
01
02
04
10
20
40
80
11
AA
HDD - HDC NOT RESET ERROR
HDD - DRIVE NOT INITIALIZE
HDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
HDD - BAD TRACK ERROR
HDD - UNDEFINED ERROR
HDD - OVERRUN ERROR (DRQ ON)
HDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
HDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
HDD - RECORD NOT FOUND ERROR
HDD - ECC ERROR
HDD - HDC ERROR
HDD - SEEK ERROR
HDD - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD - ECC RECOVER ENABLE
HDD - DRIVE NOT READY
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3-38 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (3/3)
Device name Error code Error status name
(HDD) CC
E0
0A
EE
DA
12
HDD - WRITE FAULT
HDD - STATUS ERROR
HDD - BAD SECTOR
HDD - ACCESS TIME ERROR
HDD - NO HDD
HDD - DMA CRC ERROR
NDP 01
02
03
04
05
06
NDP - NO CO-PROCESSOR
NDP - CONTROL WORD ERROR
NDP - STATUS WORD ERROR
NDP - BUS ERROR
NDP - ADDITION ERROR
NDP - MULTIPLAY ERROR
EXPANSION C1
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
CB
CC
CE
CF
ADDRESS LINE ERROR
CE#1 LINE ERROR
CE#2 LINE ERROR
DATA LINE ERROR
WAIT LINE ERROR
BSY# LINE ERROR
BVD1 LINE ERROR
ZV-Port ERROR
NO PCMCIA
CARD TYPE ERROR
ZV_CONT# ERROR
CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM 01
02
03
04
05
06
09
11
20
40
80
90
B0
BAD COMMAND
ILLEGAL LENGTH
UNIT ATTENTION
MEDIA CHANGE REQUEST
MEDIA DETECTED
ADDITIMAL SENSE
BOUNDARY ERROR
CORRECTED DATA ERROR
DRIVE NOT READY
SEEK ERROR
TIME OUT
RESET ERROR
ADDRESS ERROR
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-39
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
When an error occurs in the hard disk test, the following message is displayed:
HDC status = XXXXXXXX
Detailed information about the hard disk test error is displayed on the screen by an eight-digit
number. The first four digits represent the hard disk controller (HDC) error status number and the
last four digits are not used.
The hard disk controller error status is composed of two bytes; the first byte displays the contents
of the HDC status register in hexadecimal form and the second byte displays the HDC error
register.
The contents of the HDC status register and error register are listed in Tables 3-3 and 3-4.
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents
Bit Name Description
7 BSY
(Busy) “0” … HDC is ready.
“1” … HDC is busy.
6 DRY
(Drive ready) “0” … Hard disk drive is not ready to accept any command.
“1” … Hard disk drive is ready.
5 DWF
(Drive write fault) “0” … DWF error is not detected.
“1” … Write fault condition occurred.
4 DSC
(Drive seek complete) “0” … The hard disk drive heads are not settled over a track.
“1” … The hard disk drive heads are settled over a track.
3 DRQ
(Data request) “0” … Drive is not ready for data transfer.
“1” … Drive is ready for data transfer.
2 COR
(Corrected data) “0” … Not used
“1” … Correctable data error is corrected.
1 IDX
(Index) “0” … Not used
“1” … Index is sensed.
0 ERR
(Error) “0” … Normal
“1” … The previous command was terminated with an error.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
3-40 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table 3-4 Error register contents
Bit Name Description
7 BBK
(Bad block mark) “0” … Not used
“1” … A bad block mark is detected.
6 UNC
(Uncorrectable) “0” … There is no uncorrectable data error.
“1” … Uncorrectable data error has been detected.
5 —— Not used
4 IDN
(Identification) “0” … Not used
“1” … There is no ID field in the requested sector.
3 —— Not used
2 ABT
(Abort) “0” … Not used
“1” … Illegal command error or command abort.
1 TK0
(Track 0) “0” … The hard disk found track 0 during a recalibrate
command.
“1” … The hard disk could not find track 0 during a recalibrate
command.
0 —— Not used
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-41
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3.20.1 Program Description
This program tests the unique functions of this model.
3.20.2 Operations
Select test 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. The following menu appears in the
display.
################################################################
######## ONLY ONE TEST Menu (XXXXXXXXX) ########
################################################################
* *
* 1 ............ Pressed Key Display *
* 2 ............ Touch Pad *
* 3 ............ Internet/Mail/Cyber Button
*
* 4 ............ Kill Switch *
* 5 ............ USB *
* 6 ............ LED *
* *
* 9 ............ Common Test *
* *
****************************************************************
*
.... Press test number[1-6, 9] ?
Select the subtest number you want to test and press Enter.
To return to the DIAGNOSTIC TEST menu, select 9 and press Enter.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3-42 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Subtest 01 Pressed key display
When you execute this subtest, the keyboard layout is drawn on the display as
shown below. When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen
changes to the key character that was pressed. Holding a key down enables the
auto-repeat function that causes the key’s display character to blink.
Press Del + Enter to end the test.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-43
Subtest 02 Touch Pad
This subtest checks the functions of the touch pad as shown below.
A) Direction and parameter
B) Switching function check.
This test displays the response from the touch pad and touch pad switch. When
moving your finger on the touch pad towards the upper left, the <POINTING>
display changes according to the following illustration. If a touch pad switch is
pressed, the <BUTTONS> displays appear on the right side one by one. The
parameters appear above the <BUTTONS> (1) or (2) corresponding to the
pressed touch pad switch highlights. To end this subtest, press two touch pad
switches at the same time.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3-44 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Subtest 03 Internet/Mail/Toshiba Console Button
This subtest checks moving of the Internet button.
Press the Internet button after the following message appears.
Press [Internet button] button
This subtest checks moving of the Mail button.
Press the Mail button after the following message appears.
Press [ Mail ] button
This subtest checks moving of the Toshiba Console button.
Press the Toshiba Console button after the following message appears.
Press [ Toshiba Console ] button
If the test ends successfully, the display returns to the KEYBOARD TEST menu.
Subtest 04 Kill Switch
This subtest checks if the Wireless communication switch works properly.
If the test is started with the switch ON, following message appears in the display.
Kill switch is set to a start position (OFF)
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-45
Slide the switch to OFF position. Then, following message appears in the display.
KILL SWITCH ON !!
Slide the switch to ON position. Then, following message appears in the display.
KILL SWITCH OFF !!
After Sliding the switch to OFF position, return to the ONLY ONE TEST menu
automatically.
Subtest 05 USB
Note: When executing this subtest, USB test module and USB cable must be connected.
This subtest checks if USB port works properly.
The following menu appears in the display.
################################################################
######## ONLY ONE TEST Menu (XXXXXXXXX) #######
################################################################
* *
* 0 ............ Port 0 *
* 1 ............ Port 1 *
* 2 ............ Port 2 *
* *
* 9 ............ EXIT *
* *
****************************************************************
*
.... Press test number[0-2, 9] ?
Connect the USB test module and USB cable to the computer.
Input the port test number and press Enter.
OK message appears in the display if the test ends without fail.
NG message appears in the display if an error is found during the test. Confirm the
connection of cable, and then execute the test again.
Press 9 and Enter to return to ONLY ONE TESST menu.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3-46 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Subtest 06 LED
This subtest checks if each LED lights properly.
The following message appears in the display in order. Follow the instructions in the
display to execute the test.
[HDD Access LED test]
Press any key and following message appears in the display.
[Caps/Num/Overlay BT/W-LAN LED test]
(1) Press [Caps Lock ] key ! ...Caps (on/off)
(2) Press [Fn + F10 ] key ! ...Arrow (on/off)
(3) Press [Fn + F11 ] key ! ...Num (on/off)
(4) Slide [BT/W-LAN switch L&R]! (on/off)
Confirm corresponding LED lights properly.
Press Enter and following message appears in the display.
Check [PowerSW-LED]= Green
Check if the Power Switch LED lights in the following order.
(Green ? Orange ? Blue ? OFF)
Press any key and following message appears in the display.
Check [DC-IN]&[Power]&[Main Battery]LED= Green/Orange
Check if the each LED lights in the same color shown in the display (Message
switches Green ? Orange).
Press Enter and return to the ONLY ONE TEST menu.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.21 Head Cleaning
QOSMIO G10 Maintenance Manual (960-497) 3-47
3.21 Head Cleaning
3.21.1 Function Description
This function cleans the heads in the FDD by executing a series of head load/seek and read
operations. A cleaning kit is necessary to perform this program.
3.21.2 Operations
1. Selecting test 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the following
messages:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK HEAD CLEANING : VX.XX
Mount cleaning disk(s) on drive(s).
Press any key when ready.
2. Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, then insert the cleaning disk and press Enter.
3. When the “cleaning start” message appears, the FDD head cleaning has begun.
4. The display automatically returns to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU when the program is
completed.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.22 Log Utilities
3-48 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.22 Log Utilities
3.22.1 Function Description
This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the results in
RAM. This function can store data on a floppy disk, or output the data to a printer or the display.
The error information is displayed in the following order:
1. Error count (CNT)
2. Test name, Subtest number (TS-No)
3. Pass count (PASS)
4. Error status (STS)
5. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)
6. Write data (WD)
7. Read data (RD)
8. HDC status (HSTS)
9. Error status name (ERROR STATUS NAME)
If the power switch is turned off, the error information will be lost.
3.22 Log Utilities 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-49
3.22.2 Operations
1. Select 5 and press Enter in the DIAGNOSTIC MENU, the error information is displayed
in the following format:
XXXXX ERRORS
CNT TS-NO PASS STS ADDR WD RD HSTS [ERROR STATUS NAME]
001 FDD 02 0000 103 00001 00 00 0000 FDD-WRITE PROTECTED
001 FDD 01 0000 180 00001 00 00 0000 FDD-TIME OUT ERROR
[[1:Next,2:Prev,3:Exit,4:Clear,5:Print,6:FD Log Read,7:FD Log Write]]
2. The error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated by the following number
keys:
The 1 key scrolls the display to the next page.
The 2 key scrolls the display to the previous page.
The 3 key returns to the Diagnostic Menu.
The 4 key erases all error log information in RAM.
The 5 key outputs the error log information to a printer.
The 6 key reads the log information from a floppy disk.
The 7 key writes the log information to a floppy disk.
3. In the case of “error retry OK,” a capital “R” will be placed at the beginning of the error
status. However, it is not added to the error count.
Error status name
Error count
Pass count
Error status
Subtest number
Address
Test name
Read data
Write data
HDC status
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.23 Running Test
3-50 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.23 Running Test
3.23.1 Function Description
This function automatically executes the following tests in sequence:
1. System test (subtest 01)
2. Memory test (subtests 01, 02, 06)
3. Display test (subtest 01)
4. Real timer test (subtest 02)
5. HDD test (subtest 01)
The system automatically detects the number of floppy disk drives connected to the computer for
the FDD test.
3.23.2 Operations
1. Select 6 from the Diagnostic Menu and press Enter, the following messages for selectable
tests will appear in the display in order.
FDD write/read test (Y/N) ?
Printer wrap around test (Y/N) ?
Serial wrap around test (Y/N) ?
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test (Y/N) ?
2. To execute the test, press Y and Enter. To cancel the test, press N and Enter. If you
select the selectable tests, follow the instruction message in the display.
3. After selecting the selectable tests, the running test starts automatically. To terminate the
program, press Ctrl + Break.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-51
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3.24.1 Function Description
This function formats the FDD, copies the floppy disk and displays the dump list for both the FDD
and HDD.
1. FORMAT
Note: This program is only for testing a floppy disk drive. It is different from the
Toshiba MS-DOS FORMAT command.
This program can format a floppy disk in the following formats:
(a) 2DD: Double-sided, double-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512
bytes, 9 sectors/track.
(b) 2HD: Double-sided, high-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512
bytes, 18 sectors/track.
2. COPY
This program copies data from a source floppy disk to a target floppy disk.
3. DUMP
This program displays the contents of the floppy disk and the designated sectors of the hard
disk on the display.
4. HDD ID READ
This program reads the hard disk ID and displays hard disk information.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3-52 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.24.2 Operations
1. Selecting 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the following
message.
[ FDD UTILITIES ]
1 - FORMAT
2 - COPY
3 - DUMP
4 – HDD-ID READ
9 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
2. FORMAT program
(a) Selecting FORMAT displays the following message.
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK FORMAT : VX.XX
Drive number select (1:A, 2:B) ?
(b) Select a drive number to display the following message.
Type select (0:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(c) Select a media/drive type number and press Enter. A message similar to the one
below will be displayed.
Warning : Disk data will be destroyed.
Insert work disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(d) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the work disk and press any
key.
The following message will be displayed when the FDD format is executed.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD = X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Format start
[[track, head = XXX X]]
After the floppy disk is formatted, the following message will appear.
Format complete
Another format (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(e) Typing 1 displays the message from step (c) above. Typing 2 returns the test to the
DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-53
3. COPY program
(a) When COPY is selected, the following message appears.
FLOPPY DISK FORMAT & COPY : VX.XX
Type select (0:2DD,3:2HD) ?
(b) Selecting a media/drive type number will display a message similar to the one below.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(c) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the source disk and press any
key. The following message will appear, indicating the program has started.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD = X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Copy start
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(d) The following message will appear.
Insert target disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(e) Remove the source disk from the FDD, then insert a formatted work disk and press
any key. The following message will appear and start copying to the target disk.
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(f) When the amount of data is too large to be copied in one operation, the message
from step (b) is displayed again. After the floppy disk has been copied, the
following message will appear.
Copy complete
Another copy (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(g) To copy another disk, type 1 and the message from step (a) is displayed again.
Entering 2 returns the test program to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3-54 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4. DUMP program
(a) When DUMP is selected, the following message appears.
DIAGNOSTICS-HARD DISK & FLOPPY DISK DUMP : VX.XX
Drive type select (1:FDD, 2:HDD) ?
(b) Select a drive type. If 2:HDD is selected, the display will go to step (h). If 1:FDD is
selected, the following message will appear.
Select drive number (1:A, 2:B) ?
(c) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
Format type select (1:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(d) If 3:2HD is selected, the following message will appear. Select a media mode.
2HD media mode (1:1.20MB, 2:1.44MB, 3:1.23MB)?
(e) The following message will appear.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(f) Insert a source disk and press any key and the following message will appear.
—— Max. address ——
[Track ] = XXXX
[Head ] = XX
[Sector] = XX
Track number ????
(g) Set the track number, head number and sector number you want to dump. The
system will access the disk and dump a list. Then the message shown in (k) will
appear.
(h) The following message will appear when selecting 2:HDD in (a).
Select drive number (1:C, 2:D) ?
(i) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
---Max. address ---
[LBA ] = XXXXXXXXX
LBA number ????????
(j) Set the LBA number you want to dump. The system will access the disk and dump
a list.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-55
(k) The following message will appear. To finish the dump, select 3.
Press number key (1:up,2:down,3:end) ?
(l) The following message will appear. Selecting 2 returns to the FDD UTILITIES
MENU.
Another dump (1:Yes,2:No) ?
5. HDD ID READ program
Selecting HDD ID displays the following HDD ID configuration.
[HDD ID Read (VX.XX)] [Drive #1]
Model No. = XXXXXXX
Press Enter to return to the FDD UTILITIES MENU.
3.25 System Configuration 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-55
3
3.25 System Configuration
3.25.1 Function Description
Note: To display the system configuration, the write protect tab should be OFF
position. If the tab is ON position, move the tab to OFF position and restart the
test. Otherwise the correct information cannot be acquired.
The System Configuration program contains the following configuration information for the
computer:
1. Processor Type [Code/L2 cache]
2. Chip set [VRAM]
3. BIOS ROM version [1st ID, 2nd ID]
4. Boot ROM version
5. EC total version
6. PS Microprocessor version
7. SVP parameter version [Panel/Manufacture code/Product code]
8. Micro code revision [Processor number]
9. Total Memory Size [Conventional memory]
10. Battery code
11. HWSC
12. FSB [Voltage]
13. The number of printer ports
14. The number of ASYNC ports
15. Math co-processors
16. Floppy Disk Drive [Track/Head/Sector]
17. Hard Disk Drive [Sector/Drive size/Manufacture code]
18. Optical Disk Drive [Maker/Drive type/Manufacture code/Product code]
19. T&D total version
20. Date/Time
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.25 System Configuration
3-56 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.25.2 Operations
Select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. Then, the following system
configuration appears in the display.
System Configuration Display : Ver X.XX [Machine Name ???]
* - Processor Type = XXXXXX-XXXXXMHz Code = XX L2 Cache = XXXXXKB
* - Chip set = XXXXXX VRAM = XXXXMB
* - BIOS ROM Version = VX.XX 1st ID = XXH, 2nd ID = XXH
* - BOOT ROM Version = VX.XX
* - EC Total Version = VX.XX
* - PS Micon Version = VX.XX
* - SVP Par. Version = VX.XX (Panel=XXXXXXXXX, Manu=XXXX, Prod=XXXX)
* - Micro code Revision = VX.XX (Processor=XXXh)
* - Total Memory Size = XXXXXXMB (Conventional Memory = XXXKB)
* - Battery Code = XXXXXXXXXXXX
* - HWSC = XXXXXXX
* - FSB = XXXXXMHz (Voltage = XEh)
* - X Printer Adapter LPT1 = XXXX LPT2 = XXXX LPT3 = XXXX
* - X ASYNC Adapter COM1 = XXXX COM2 = XXXX COM3 = XXXX
* - X Math CO-Processor
* - X USB Floppy Disk Drive(s) Track = XX Head = XX, Sector = XX
* - X Hard Disk Drive(s) #1 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
#2 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
* - ODD = XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX [XXXXXXXXXXXX]
* - T&D Total Version = VX.XX
Press [Enter] Key [Date = XXXX-YY-ZZ, XX:YY:ZZ]
Press Enter to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g) 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-57
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intel-made
Calexico 802.11b/g). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN
test. Finish the tests of the Main test program by selecting 99 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Then in the DIAGNOSTICS MENU, select 9 - EXIT TO
MS-DOS.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the power
while pressing U.
The following menu appears in the display.
******Intel Calexico 11b/g Card Maintenance test Menu*****
* *
* 1 : SKU check of Module *
* *
* 2 : MAC Address Check *
* *
* 3 : Antenna Check & communication test of 11b mode *
* *
* 4 : Communication test of 11g mode *
* *
* 5 : All the tests of Calexico 11g Card *
* (SKU & MAC Check, 11b/g communication test) *
* *
**********************************************************
SELECT TEST No. (1-5) :
To execute the subtest, input the subtest number and press Enter.
Subtest01 SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed. When
selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm if the
right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
************************************************************
* *
* Module : Intel Calexico 802.11b/g (MoW) *
* G-code : G36C0000X310 *
* PBA No. : C55369 *
* *
************************************************************
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key to return to the test menu.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
3-58 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
? Bad connection of wireless LAN card
? Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
? Defective wireless LAN card
Check the connection and execute the subtest again.
Subtest02 MAC Address Check
This subtest displays the MAC address. When selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
********************MAC CHECK*******************************
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
************************************************************
************************************************************
* *
* MAC Address Check : OK !! *
* *
************************************************************
Press any key to return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, following message will appear in the display.
*********************MAC CHECK******************************
ERROR: MAC all 0
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
************************************************************
************************************************************
* *
* MAC Address Check : NG !! *
* *
************************************************************
Press any key to return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
? Bad of wireless LAN card
? Defective wireless LAN card
? Disappearance of MAC address data
Check the connection and execute the subtest again.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g) 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-59
Subtest03 Antenna check & communication test of 11b mode
Caution: To execute subtest 03-05, use another computer (with Calexico wireless LAN
card) that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine.
Access points are also required. (Access point for 802.11b and 802.11g)
Be sure to turn the wireless communication switch ON before executing
wireless LAN communication test. (The wireless communication LED lights
orange.)
Release the write-protection of floppy disk for the test.
Turn on the responder machine before selecting subtest 03-05.
Setting the responder machine
Connect the responder machine to the access points (for 802.11b and 802.11g) with a cross cable
and turn on the access points.
Insert the floppy disk containing the wireless LAN test program into the FDD of the responder
machine and turn on the responder machine.
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN antenna of
Calexico 802.11b mode.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key to
return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and following message will appear in the display. Check which
antenna (Main/Aux) is defective.
*************************************************************
* *
* Main Antenna Test : NG !! *
* *
*************************************************************
Press any key to return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
? Bad connection of wireless LAN card
? Bad connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main/Aux)
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
3-60 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
? Bad environment for wireless LAN communication (Interference/
obstruction)
? Defective wireless LAN card
Check the connection and condition, and execute the subtest again.
Subtest04 Communication test of 11g mode
This subtest checks the communication of wireless LAN antenna of Calexico
802.11g mode.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key to
return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
************************************************************
* *
* 11g Communication Test : NG !! *
* *
************************************************************
Press any key to return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
? Bad connection of wireless LAN card
? Bad connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main)
? Bad environment for wireless LAN communication (Interference/
obstruction)
? Defective wireless LAN card
Check the connection and condition, and execute the subtest again.
Subtest05 All the tests of Calexico 11b/g Card
This subtest checks SKU information, MAC address, connection and
communication of wireless LAN antenna of Calexico 802.11b/g card. The test
stops at when a defective is found. For more details, refer to each subtest.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made) 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-61
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Askey-made
Atheros b/g, a/b/g).
Caution: To execute subtest 03-07, use another computer (with Atheros wireless LAN
card) that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine to
perform those tests.
Another wireless communication tool with 2.4GHz like Bluetooth is
interfering with the test. Execute this test in the condition with no
interference around the computer.
Be sure to turn the wireless communication switch ON before executing
wireless LAN communication test. (The wireless communication LED lights
orange.)
Release the write-protection of floppy disk for the test.
Setting the responder machine
To execute subtest 03-07, responder machine with wireless LAN communication function
(Atheros-made) is required. To set the responder machine, follow the procedures below.
1. Insert the test program disk to the FDD of responder machine and turn on the power.
2. The program for responder machine starts automatically.
3. The program for responder machine is set.
Setting the tester (DUT) machine
1. Insert the test program disk 1 for DUT to the FDD of tester machine and turn on the power.
2. The program disk 1 is executed and following message will appear in the display.
************************************************************
* *
* Atheros MB4x Maintenance T&D (DUT) *
* *
* Please exchange for DUT media 2 *
************************************************************
Please input the “S” key and push the “Enter” key :
3. Take out the program disk 1 and insert program disk 2. Then, press S and Enter.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
3-62 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4. When the program disk 2 starts, following menu will appear in the display. To execute the
subtest, press test number and Enter.
*******************************************************
* Atheros MB4x(MB44ag/43g) Maintenance T&D Menu *
* *
* 1 : SKU check of Module *
* *
* 2 : MAC Address Check *
* *
* 3 : Communication test of 11a mode(MB44ag) *
* *
* 4 : Communication test of 11b mode(MB44ag/MB43g) *
* *
* 5 : Communication test of 11g mode(MB44ag/MB43g) *
* *
* 6 : All the tests of MB43g Module *
* (SKU & MAC Check, 11b/g communication test) *
* *
* 7 : All the tests of MB44ag Module *
* (SKU & MAC Check, 11a/b/g communication test) *
* *
*******************************************************
SELECT TEST No. (1-7) :
Subtest01 SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed. When
selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm if the
right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
* *
* Module : Atheros MB44ag (RoW) *
* G code : G36C00010310 *
* *
*************************************************************
Press any key to return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
? Bad connection of wireless LAN card
? Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
? Defective wireless LAN card
Check the connection and execute the subtest again.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made) 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-63
Subtest02 MAC Address Check
This subtest reads out the MAC address of the card installed and confirms if it is
valid. When the MAC address is valid one, following message will appear in the
display.
*************************************************************
* *
* MAC Address Check : OK !! *
* *
*************************************************************
Press any key to return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
? Connection of wireless LAN card
? Defective wireless LAN card
? Disappearance of MAC address data
Check the connection and execute the subtest again.
Subtest03 Communication test of 11a mode (MB44ag)
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN antenna of
Atheros 802.11a mode. Check the number of packets, throughput and RSSI and
compare them with the standard.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key to
return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
************************************************************
* *
* 11a Communication Test : NG !! *
* *
* Please refer to log. txt *
* *
************************************************************
Press any key to return to the test menu.
When a defective is found, open the log file (log.txt) and check the result.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
3-64 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Moreover, following typical cause is considered.
? Bad connection of wireless LAN card
? Bad connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main/Aux)
? Environment for wireless LAN communication (Interference/ obstruction)
? Defective wireless LAN card
Check the connection and condition, and execute the subtest again.
Subtest04 Communication test of 11b mode (MB44ag/MB43g)
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN antenna of
Atheros 802.11b mode.
For more details on the contents, refer to subtest 03.
Subtest05 Communication test of 11g mode (MB44ag/MB43g)
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN antenna of
Atheros 802.11g mode.
For more details on the contents, refer to subtest 03.
Subtest06 All the tests of MB43g Module
This subtest checks SKU information, MAC address, connection and
communication of wireless LAN antenna of Atheros 802.11b mode and Atheros
802.11g mode. The test stops at when a defective is found. For more details, refer
to each subtest.
Subtest07 All the tests of MB44ag Module
This subtest checks SKU information, MAC address, connection and
communication of wireless LAN antenna of Atheros 802.11a mode, Atheros
802.11b mode and Atheros 802.11g mode. The test stops at when a defective is
found. For more details, refer to each subtest.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-65
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
This section describes how to perform the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test with the test
program.
Insert the test program disk for LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test in FDD and turn on the
power. The following message will appear.
Microsoft Windows XX Startup Menu
----------------------------------
1. LAN
2. Modem
3. Bluetooth
4. IEEE1394
Enter a choice:
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
Note: It is impossible to go back to startup menu once you choose the test. Therefore,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test can not be executed successively.
3.28.1 LAN test
To execute LAN test, press 1 and Enter. The following message will appear:
#####################################################################
######### i82562 ICHx Gbe (i82540) Diagnostics program ######
#####################################################################
* *
* 1 ............ (i82562 + ICHx) *
* *
* 2 ............ (Gbe) *
* *
*********************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-2] ?
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3-66 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Subtest01 (i82562 + ICHx)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the chip.
The following message will appear.
[LAN transmit & receive test !]
COMPLETED Repeat count = 00000
Error count = 00000
LOOPBACK TEST
100Mbps Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
Destination Address = xxxxxxxxxxxx
Source Address = xxxxxxxxxxxx
** 100Base-TX Full-Duplex **
< TRANSMIT >
< RECEIVE >
Note: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-67
Subtest02 (GbE)
Note: Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) test is not supported for this model.
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the chip.
Select 2 to execute and press Enter.
The following message will appear.
Testing adapter...hit <ESC> to abort.
*
External Loopback Test...PASSED
Testing completed.
*
*
Loopback Test Complete
*
*
* 1000Base Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
*
* CE Test Complete
Note: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3-68 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.28.2 Modem test
For this subtest, connect the modem PCB and RJ11 connector with a harness. Use the dedicated
“FAT-MODE inspection device (product code: QE2000P01 made by Nitto Electric Manufacture
Co.,Ltd)” for the tests.
To execute Modem test, press 2 and Enter. Following message will appear.
[Modem loopback test !]
ICHx MDC Test Program with Modem Sound (Line Test)
Version X.X
* Scorpio Modem Initialize :OK
* Digital Loopback Test :OK
* RJ11 Connector Check (LED) :(Operator’s Check!!)
Note: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
RJ11 Connection Check (LED) (Operator’s Check LED) test will be executed, and the following
message will appear.
...Press Key (Y = OK , N =NG)
If the color in the LED of the connection checker is orange, press Y, otherwise, press N.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-69
3.28.3 Bluetooth test
Note: Bluetooth test is not supported in this model.
To execute this test, input 3 and press Enter.
Note: Use another computer that can communicate by the Bluetooth as a reference
machine to perform this test.
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the target machine and turn on the target
machine. The following Bluetooth test menu will appear.
#######################################################################
#### Bluetooth sub system test program VX.XX ####
#######################################################################
* *
* 1....BD_ADDR check *
* *
* 3... Communications test (DUT mode) *
* *
* T....communications test (TEST mode) *
* *
***********************************************************************
....Press test number [1, 3, T] ? _
Press 1 or 3 key to perform the corresponding subtest. To quit the Bluetooth test program, eject
the floppy disk and turn the computer off while the menu above is displayed.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3-70 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Subtest01 BD_ADDR check
This subtest checks the BD_ADDR functions. When the Bluetooth test menu is
displayed, press 1 to select the test and press Enter. The following message will
appear:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA
Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Initializing …
When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR. If BD_ADDR has
no problem, the following message is displayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA
Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
PPPPPP A SSSSS SSSSS
P P A A S S S S
P P A A S S
PPPPPP A A SSSSS SSSSS
P AAAAAAA S S
P A A S S S S
P A A SSSSS SSSSS
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-71
If the target machine has any problem, it displays Error message. The following
message is displayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA
Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
FFFFFF A III L
F A A I L
F A A I L
FFFFFF A A I L
F AAAAAAA I L
F A A I L
F A A III LLLLLLL
Table 3-5 Error message
Message Contents
Invalid BD_ADDR (all 00) 0x000000000000
Invalid BD_ADDR (all FF) 0xFFFFFFFFFFFF
Invalid BD_ADDR (bit0=1) bit40=1b
Invalid BD_ADDR (bit1=1) bit41=1b
Invalid BD_ADDR (define in the file) Defined BD_ADDR
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3-72 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (1/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x01 Unknown HCI Command.
0x02 No Connection.
0x03 Hardware Failure.
0x04 Page Timeout.
0x05 Authentication Failure.
0x06 Key Missing.
0x07 Memory Full.
0x08 Connection Timeout.
0x09 Max Number Of Connections.
0x0a Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
0x0b ACL Connection already exists.
0x0c Command Disallowed.
0x0d Host Rejected due to limited resources.
0x0e Host Rejected due to security reasons.
0x0f Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal device.
0x10 Host Timeout.
0x11 Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
0x12 Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
0x13 Other End Terminated Connection: Used Ended Connection.
0x14 Other End Terminated Connection: Low Resources.
0x15 Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power Off.
0x16 Connection Terminated by Local Host.
0x17 Repeated Attempts.
0x18 Paring Not Allowed.
0x19 Unknown LMP PDU.
0x1a Unsupported Remote Feature.
0x1b SCO Offset Rejected.
0x1c SCO Interval Rejected.
0x1d SCO Air Mode Rejected.
0x1e Invalid LMP Parameters.
0x1f Unspecified Error.
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System for details.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-73
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (2/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x20 Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
0x21 Role Change Not Allowed.
0x22 LMP Response Timeout.
0x23 LMP Error Transaction Collision.
0x24 LMP PDU Not Allowed.
0x25 Not Exist
0x26 Not Exist
0x27 Not Exist
0x28 Not Exist
0x29 Not Exist
0x2a Not Exist
0x2b Not Exist
0x2c Not Exist
0x2d Not Exist
0x2e Not Exist
0x2f Not Exist
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
Subtest03 Communication test (DUT mode)
Subtest T Communication test (TEST mode)
This subtest checks the Bluetooth communication functions. Set the responder
machine to DUT mode and tester machine to TEST mode.
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the responder machine and turn
on the power. The Bluetooth test menu will appear.
Press 3 to select the test and press Enter of the responder machine. The following
message will appear:
When the test begins, the machine displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. The progress
bar appears when the preparation is completed. The following message is
displayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA
Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
+----------------------+
| DUT | BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3-74 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Ready>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> <- Progress Bar
[ESC] : Stop
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the tester machine and turn on
the power. When the Bluetooth test menu is displayed on the tester machine, press
T and Enter to select the subtest. The following message will appear:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA
Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
+------------------+
| |
| Tester |
| |
+------------------+
[ESC]:Finish Tester [SPACE]:Start
Is DUT ready?
Then press Space to start the Bluetooth communication test.
When the communication test has been completed without fail, the DUT machine
displays BD_ADDR. If the connection with the tester is completed, the progress
bar stops. The following message is shown.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA
Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
+----------------------+
| DUT | BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-75
CCCC OOO M M PPPPPP L EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE DDDDD
C C O O MM MM P P L E T E D D
C O O M M M M P P L E T E D D
C O O M M M PPPPPP L EEEEEE T EEEEEEE D D
C O O M M P L E T E D D
C C O O M M P L E T E D D
CCCC OOO M M P LLLLLLL EEEEEE T EEEEEEE DDDDD
Testing is finished
A>_
If the DUT machine has any problem or S of the DUT machine is pressed before
connection to tester machine, the following message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA
Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
+----------------------+
| DUT | BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
III N N CCCC OOO M M PPPPPP L EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE
I NN N C C O O MM MM P P L E T E
I N N N C O O M M M M P P L E T E
I N N N C O O M M M PPPPPP L EEEEEE T EEEEEEE
I N N N C O O M M P L E T E
I N NN C C O O M M P L E T E
III N N CCCC OOO M M P LLLLLLL EEEEEE T EEEEEEE
Testing is finished
A>
If any problem is detected during the test, the massage FAIL is displayed on the
tester machine with the error code as shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3-76 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Error code
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (1/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x01 Unknown HCI Command.
0x02 No Connection.
0x03 Hardware Failure.
0x04 Page Timeout.
0x05 Authentication Failure.
0x06 Key Missing.
0x07 Memory Full.
0x08 Connection Timeout.
0x09 Max Number Of Connections.
0x0a Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
0x0b ACL Connection already exists.
0x0c Command Disallowed.
0x0d Host Rejected due to limited resources.
0x0e Host Rejected due to security reasons.
0x0f Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal device.
0x10 Host Timeout.
0x11 Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
0x12 Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
0x13 Other End Terminated Connection: Used Ended Connection.
0x14 Other End Terminated Connection: Low Resources.
0x15 Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power Off.
0x16 Connection Terminated by Local Host.
0x17 Repeated Attempts.
0x18 Paring Not Allowed.
0x19 Unknown LMP PDU.
0x1a Unsupported Remote Feature.
0x1b SCO Offset Rejected.
0x1c SCO Interval Rejected.
0x1d SCO Air Mode Rejected.
0x1e Invalid LMP Parameters.
0x1f Unspecified Error.
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-77
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (2/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x20 Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
0x21 Role Change Not Allowed.
0x22 LMP Response Timeout.
0x23 LMP Error Transaction Collision.
0x24 LMP PDU Not Allowed.
0x25 Not Exist
0x26 Not Exist
0x27 Not Exist
0x28 Not Exist
0x29 Not Exist
0x2a Not Exist
0x2b Not Exist
0x2c Not Exist
0x2d Not Exist
0x2e Not Exist
0x2f Not Exist
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3-78 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.28.4 IEEE1394 test
To execute this test, input 4 and press Enter.
Note: Use another computer that can communicate by IEEE1394 (i. Link) cable as a
reference machine to perform this test.
The following menu will appear:
********************************************************************
******** IEEE1394[XXXXX] Diagnostics program **************
********************************************************************
* *
* 1 ....(Transmit & Receive test) *
* *
* 2 ....(Responder set) *
* *
* 3 ....(1394 GUID Display) *
* *
********************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3] ?
To execute the TEST, select the test number you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest01 Transmit & Receive test
Note: Before executing subtest 01, be sure to execute subtest 02 in the responder
machine.
This program checks the data transporting between responder machine and target
machine and compare them with the original data through the IEEE1394 cable.
Subtest02 Responder set
This program is executed in the responder machine to initialize the responder
machine with the IEEE1394 cable connected to the target machine before executing
subtest 01.
Subtest03 IEEE1394 GUID Display
This program checks the GUID of IEEE1394.
3.29 Sound Test program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-79
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
This section describes how to perform the Sound test. To execute the sound test, refer to the
following description.
Insert the test program disk for Sound test in the floppy disk drive and turn on the power. The
following message will appear:
###############################################################
###### WSS, Sound blaster pro Diagnostics program ######
###############################################################
* *
* 1 ............ Sound (Standard) *
* *
* 2 ............ Sound (Legacy) *
* *
* 3 ............ CD Sound (Standard) *
* *
* 4 ............ CD Sound (Legacy) *
* *
* ---It outputs at the speaker and lineout--- *
* *
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-4] ?
Input the test number and press Enter.
3.29.1 Sound (Standard) test
To execute the Sound (Standard) test, press 1 and Enter. The following menu will appear in the
display.
###############################################################
###### ICH4-M + AD1981A Diagnostics program ######
###############################################################
* *
* 1 ............ ( Microphone recording & play ) *
* 2 ............ ( Sine wave ) *
* 3 ............ ( Line IN recording & play ) *
* *
* 9 ............ Exit to Main *
* *
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3, 9] ?
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.29 Sound Test program
3-80 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
To return to the Sound test menu, Press 9 and Enter. Then following message will appear in the
display.
***********************************
******** May I Restart ? *******
***********************************
Press any key to continue…
After pressing any key, the machine starts rebooting and sound test menu will appear in the display.
Subtest01 Microphone recording & play
This subtest checks the function of the CODEC A/D, D/A converter.
When this subtest is selected, the following message will appear.
[Recording & play test !]
And the following message will appear.
DOS/4GW Protected Mode Run-time Version X.XX
Copyright (c) Tenberry Software, Inc. XXXX
After this message appears, display stops briefly. In this timing, sound is recorded
from internal microphone.
After the recording is completed, the computer plays back the sound recorded after
the following message.
STACWAVE Version X.XX
Build data: XXX XX XXXX at XX:XX:XX
Loading “mic.wav”.
Note: The message in the display might have slight difference from those above.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
3.29 Sound Test program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-81
Subtest02 Sine Wave
This subtest is executed by loading the COM file (ADSIN.COM). The program
expands sine wave data table from 16KB to 64KB, and creates the play data. Then
it transfers the data between the DMA and the CODEC to play the sine wave. (It
sounds like a continuous beep). By using wave measurable devices such as an
oscilloscope, the data can be measured as a sine wave.
When the subtest is executed, the sine wave is played while expanding sine wave
from 16KB to 64KB.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
Subtest03 Line IN recording & play
This subtest executes the same test as the subtest01 by recorded sound from the
different port (Line-in port).
For more details on the subtest, refer to the subtest01 Microphone recording &
play.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
3.29.2 Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the Sound (Legacy) test, select 2 and press Enter.
Note: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.29 Sound Test program
3-82 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.29.3 CD Sound (Standard) test
To execute the CD Sound (Standard) test, press 3 and Enter. Insert the test media (TOSHIBA
TEST CD-ROM or ABEX TEST CD-ROM) or music CD on the market (if the test media can not
be prepared). Following menu appears in the display.
For details on use of test media, refer to 3.29.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media).
For details on use of audio CD on the market, refer to 3.29.3.2 Audio CD.
3.29.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media)
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
[Ctrl]+[C] ; key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX READ DATA : XX
ADDRESS : XXXXXX STATUS : XXX
01 – Japanese Narration
02 – English Narration
03 – Test Tone A (100Hz – 20Hz)
04 - Test Tone B (400Hz – 3KHz L-R)
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Subtest01 Japanese Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in Japanese starts and following message appears in
the display.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <Play stop>.
3.29 Sound Test program 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-83
Press any key and stop the narration. Then return to the CD Sound (Standard) test
menu.
Subtest02 English Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in English starts.
For more details on the procedure, refer to the subtest01.
Subtest03 Test Tone A
Caution: Before starting subtest03, be sure to set the sound at proper volume.
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 100Hz to 20Hz.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
Subtest 04 Test Tone B
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 400Hz to 3KHz and also
changing the channel from left speaker to right speaker.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.29 Sound Test program
3-84 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3.29.3.2 Audio CD
Insert an audio CD and the following menu appears in the display.
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
[Ctrl]+[C] ; key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX READ DATA : XX
ADDRESS : XXXXXX STATUS : XXX
CD Sound track number (01-98 : Track) ?
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Select the track number you want to test and press Enter twice.
The following message appears in the display and selected track is played.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <play stop>
After pressing any key, the music stops and the display returns to the selection menu of the track
number.
Note: When the CD-ROM test is executed, [ALL DEVICE] must be selected in the
“Device Config.=” of the BIOS SETUP. If the “ALL DEVICE” is not selected,
music can not be played.
3.29.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the CD Sound (Legacy) test, select 4 and press Enter.
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-85
Caution: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
3.30 SETUP
3.30.1 Function Description
This program displays the current system setup information as listed below:
1. Memory
2. System Date/Time
3. Battery
4. Password
5. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
(b) HDD Priority
(c) Network Boot Protocol
6. Others
(a) CPU Cache
(b) Level 2 Cache
(c) Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
(d) Auto Power On
(e) Start Up Logo
(f) Sound Logo
(g) Power Button Lamp
7. Configuration
8. Drives I/O
(a) Built-in HDD
(b) CD-ROM
9. PCI Bus
10. Display
(a) Power On Display
(b) LCD Display Stretch
(c) TV Type
11. Peripheral
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-86 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
(a) Internal Pointing Device
(b) Hard Disk Mode
12. LEGACY EMULATION
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
13. PCI LAN
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-87
3.30.2 Accessing the SETUP Program
While pressing ESC, turn on the power. Then press F1. The following display appears.
*1: displayed only in Pentium models
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-88 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Moving Within the SETUP Menu and Changing Values
1. Press ? and ? to move between the two columns. Press ? and ? to move between items
in a column. Press Fn+???PgUp) and Fn + ???PgDn) to move between the two pages.
2. Press either the Space bar or Back Space to change the value.
Accepting Changes and Exiting the SETUP Window
1. Press End to accept the changes you made.
If the changed item does not require the system to reboot, the following message is
displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
If the changed item requires the system to reboot, the following message is displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.
2. To make other changes, press N. Repeat the steps above.
3. To accept the changes, press Y.
Note: You can press Esc to quit at any time without saving changes. SETUP asks you
to confirm that you do not want to save your changes. When SETUP is displayed
at the next time, the current configuration appears.
The Factory Preset Configuration
When you access SETUP, the current configuration is displayed.
1. To show the factory preset configuration, press Home.
2. To accept the default settings, press End and then press Y.
Note: When you execute the default setting, the following settings are not changed:
HDD Mode
Password
Write Policy
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-89
SETUP Options
The SETUP screen is divided into 13 functionally related groups. This section describes each group
and its options.
1. Memory
This group of options displays the computer’s memory.
This field displays the total amount of memory installed and is automatically
calculated by the computer. You cannot change this value.
2. System Date/Time
Sets the date and time.
Date Sets date.
Time Sets time.
3. Battery
This option is used to select Full Power, Low Power or User Setting of the battery save
mode. When you select the battery save mode, the followings will appear.
Full Power The following shows full power settings.
Low Power The following shows low power settings.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-90 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Note: 1. In boot mode, the System Auto Off (*1) item does not appear.
2. Display of the LCD Brightness will be changed in the condition below:
(*2) Operating the battery
(*3) Using the AC adapter
User Setting Use this option to set the battery save parameters on
the sub-window, BATTERY SAVE OPTIONS.
Battery Save Options
Processing Speed
This feature changes the CPU processing speed.
High CPU operates at 1.60GHz (Pentium-M).
(Default in Full Power Mode)
Low CPU operates at half processing speed.
(Default in Low Power Mode)
CPU Sleep Mode
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU sleep function.
Enabled Enables sleep mode. (Default)
Disabled Disables sleep mode.
Display Auto Off
Use this option to disable or set the duration of the display automatic power off
function. This function causes the computer to turn the LCD panel’s illumination off
if you make no entry (including no operation of a mouse or touch pad) for the set
period of time.
Disabled Disables display automatic power off.
xx Min. Automatically turns off the power to the LCD panel’s
illumination if the panel is not used for the duration set.
The duration xx can be set to 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30
minutes.
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-91
HDD Auto Off
Use this option to set the duration of the HDD automatic power off function.
xx Min. Automatically turns off the power to the hard disk drive
if it is not used for the duration set. The duration xx
can be set to 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes.
System Auto Off
Use this option to disable or set the duration of the system automatic off function in
Resume mode. In Boot mode, it is disabled.
Disabled Disables system automatic power off.
xx Min. Automatically turns off the power to the system if it is
not used for the duration set. The duration xx can be
set to 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 or 60 minutes.
LCD Brightness
Use this option to set the level of LCD brightness.
Super-Bright Full brightness for maximum visibility.
Bright Full brightness for high visibility.
Semi-Bright Less than full brightness for saving power.
Cooling Method
Maximum Performance If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on
automatically in a high speed to cool down the
CPU.
Performance If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on
automatically. When the CPU temperature falls to
a normal range, the fan turns off.
Battery optimized If the CPU becomes too hot, the processing speed is
lowered. If the temperature is still too high, the fan
turns on. When the CPU temperature falls to a
normal range, the fan is turned off and the
processing speed is increased.
Note: Too hot condition may cause defect on the CPU. When the hot condition
continues, the power is automatically turned off in resume mode.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-92 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4. Password
This option sets or resets the user password for power on and instant security (Fn+F1).
Registered The user password has been registered.
Not registered The user password has not been registered.
For details on setting the user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
5. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
Use this option to set the priority for booting of the computer and the priority for the
HDD for booting.
FDD?HDD?CD-ROM?LAN: The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: FDD, HDD, CD-ROM
(*1) and LAN
HDD?CD-ROM?LAN?FDD: The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: HDD, CD-ROM, LAN
and FDD.
FDD?CD-ROM?LAN?HDD: The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: FDD, CD-ROM, LAN
and HDD.
CD-ROM?LAN?HDD?FDD: The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: CD-ROM, LAN, HDD
and FDD.
CD-ROM?LAN?FDD?HDD: The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: CD-ROM, LAN, FDD
and HDD.
HDD?FDD?CD-ROM?LAN: The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: HDD, FDD, CD-ROM
and LAN. (Default)
(*1) CD-ROM refers to an Optical Disk Drive.
(b) HDD Boot Priority
Use this option to set the booting priority from HDD.
Built-in HDD?PC Card (Default)
: When HDD occurs in the boot priority in the following order:
built-in HDD and PC card.
PC Card?Built-in HDD
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-93
: When HDD occurs in the boot priority in the following order:
PC card and built-in HDD.
(c) Network Boot Protocol
Use this option to set the starting method via a network.
PXE Sets to PXE protocol. (Default)
RPL Sets to RPL protocol.
6. Display
This option configures the computer’s display.
(a) Power On Display
This option is used to select the display when booting up.
Auto-Selected Selects an external monitor if one is connected.
Otherwise it selects the internal LCD. (Default)
LCD + Analog RGB Selects both the internal LCD and the external CRT for
simultaneous display.
Note: When LCD + Analog RGB is selected while connecting the external display not
corresponding to SVGA mode, no image appears on the display.
(b) LCD Display Stretch
LCD Display Stretch enables or disables a larger display area of the screen.
Enabled Enables the LCD display stretch feature. (Default)
Disabled Disables the LCD display stretch feature.
(c) TV type
Selects TV type.
NTSC (JAPAN) for Japan
NTSC (US) for US
PAL for Europe
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-94 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
7. Others
Whether or not you need to configure the computer with these options depends primarily on
the kind of software or peripherals you use.
(a) Power-up Mode
Use this option to choose between resume and boot mode.
Boot Turns on boot mode. (Default)
Resume Turns on resume mode.
(b) CPU Cache
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU cache.
Enabled Enables the CPU cache. (Default)
Disabled Disables the CPU cache.
(c) Level 2 Cache
Use this option to enable or disable the level 2 cache. When “CPU Cache” is set to
“Disabled”, this option cannot be changed.
Enabled Enables the level 2 cache. (Default)
Disabled Disables the level 2 cache.
(d) Dynamic CPU Frequency mode
Use this option to choose a setting from the followings. When the CPU of the
computer is Celeron-M, this option is not displayed.
Dynamically Switchable
Enables Pentium-M processor featuring Intel SpeedStep
technology. (Default)
Always High Disables Pentium-M processor featuring Intel SpeedStep
technology and always runs the processor at its maximum
speed.
Always Low Disables Pentium-M processor featuring Intel SpeedStep
technology and always runs the processor at its default
speed.
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-95
(e) Auto Power On
This option displays setting for Auto Power On.
Disabled Indicates auto power on is not set.
Enabled Indicates auto power on is set.
When “Enabled” is selected, the following sub-window appears.
Set the parameters for the Auto Power On (automatic power on) function in the
“OPTIONS” window. To set the time, use Space or BackSpace. Press ? to
move the cursor to the right and ? to move the cursor to the left when you set the
date and time.
For the Alarm Time, set the time to turn on the power automatically. The “second”
cannot be set. When it is set to “Disabled”, the time to turn on automatically is not
set.
For the Alarm Date Option, set the date to turn on the power automatically.
When it is set to “Disabled”, the time to turn on automatically is not set.
The Ring Indicator is displayed only when the computer is in Resume mode and
this function cannot be used for a PC card-type modem. When any modem is not
installed, it is not displayed.
Note: 1. Do not remove the AC adaptor and battery pack at the same time when you
use this feature. If you do so, data saved by the resume function will be lost.
You must also reset this option.
2. If you have set a password and the computer boots by the Auto Power On
function and Resume is on, the computer will start with the instant security
function enabled. The password = message is not displayed; however, you
must enter the password to use the computer.
3. This option is enabled only once, the setting is reset, after booting up.
(f) Start Up Logo
This option enables or disables an animation logo function.
Animation Enables the animation logo function. (Default)
Picture Displays picture logo.
Alarm Time = 00:00:00
Alarm Date Option = Disabled
Ring Indicator = Disabled
OP
TIONS
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-96 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
(g) Sound Logo
This option enables or disables sound logo function.
Enabled Enables the sound logo function. (Default)
Disabled Disables the sound logo function.
(h) Power Button Lamp
This option sets the power button lamp.
Table 3-8 Lamp pattern of power button
Status Power ON Standby Power off/halt
Mode
1(default) Lights blue. Lights yellow. Lights orange.
Mode 2 Lights orange. Lights white. Lights white.
Mode 3 Blinks in order of
green, orange and
blue.
Lights yellow. Lights orange.
Off Does not light.
When the AC adapter and battery pack are removed, once the setting returns to
Mode1 (default). After turning on the power of the computer again, the setting
returns to the one before the AC adapter and battery pack are removed.
(i) Panel Power On/Off
This option enables or disables the power on/off function by opening and closing the
display panel.
This option is displayed only when the Power-UP Mode is set to Resume.
Enabled Enables the panel function.
Disabled Disables the panel function. (Default)
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-97
8. Configuration
This option lets you set the device configuration.
All Devices BIOS sets all devices.
Setup by OS Initializes devices, which is needed to load an operating
system. Operating system initializes other devices. When
this option is selected, the setting in the “PC Card”
becomes “Auto-Selected” and it can not be changed.
(Default)
Note: When using installed OS, selecting “Set by OS” is recommended. But, when
setting “PC CARD-Controller Mode” to other than “ Auto-Selected”, select
“All Devices”.
9. Drives I/O
This option displays the address and interrupt level for hard disk drive and optical disk
drive. It is for information only and cannot be changed.
Built-in HDD This cannot be changed.
CD-ROM This cannot be changed. This is not displayed when a drive
is not built-in.
PC-card Displays an address and interrupt level only when the
system has been booted by a PC-card type HDD.
10. PCI Bus
This option displays the interrupt level for the Card Bus in the computer. It is for information
only and cannot be changed.
PCI BUS = IRQ10, IRQ11
11. PC Card
This option displays the PC Card Controller mode. When “Device Config.” is set to “All
Devices”, it can be changed.
Auto-Selected Use this setting when OS supports Plug&Play. (Default)
PCIC Compatible Use this setting when Card Bus does not work properly in
“Auto-Selected” or PC card supports 16-bit.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-98 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Card Bus/16 bit Use this setting when Card Bus does not work properly in
“Auto-Selected”.
3.30 SETUP 3 Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 3-99
12. Peripheral
This option sets the HDD and other devices.
(a) Internal Pointing Device
Enabled Enables touch pad. (Default)
Disabled Disables touch pad.
Note: If Disabled is select, the touch pad can not be on or off on Windows.
(b) Hard Disk Mode
Use this item to select the hard disk mode.
Enhanced IDE (Normal) :
Select this mode when the HDD is used for Windows XP
Tablet PC Edition. (Default)
Standard IDE : Select this mode when using an OS that does not support the
Enhanced IDE. When this mode is selected, up to 528MB is
logically available and the rest of the capacity is not usable.
Note: Formats for Enhanced IDE and Standard IDE are different, so if you change the
setting, you will have to reformat the hard disk for the appropriate setting.
13. LEGACY EMULATION
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
This option sets the Legacy support condition of the USB keyboard and the USB
mouse.
Enabled Enables LEGACY support. (Default)
USB keyboard/USB mouse is available without the driver.
Disabled Disables LEGACY support.
3 Tests and Diagnostics 3.30 SETUP
3-100 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
This option sets the Legacy support condition of the USB floppy disk drive.
Enabled Enables LEGACY support. (Default)
USB floppy disk is available without the driver.
To start the computer by FD, set this option to “Enabled”.
Disabled Disables LEGACY support.
14. PCI LAN
This option sets the Enable / Disable of the built-in LAN functions.
Enabled Enables built-in LAN functions. (Default)
Disabled Disables built-in LAN functions.
Chapter 4
Replacement Procedures
4 Replacement Procedures
4-ii PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4
4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-iii
Chapter 4 Contents
4.1 Overview..............................................................................................................4-1
Safety precautions..........................................................................................4-2
Before you begin............................................................................................4-3
Disassembly procedures.................................................................................4-4
Assembly procedures .....................................................................................4-5
Tools and equipment ......................................................................................4-5
Screw tightening torque .................................................................................4-6
Grip color .......................................................................................................4-6
Screw notation................................................................................................4-7
4.2 Battery pack .........................................................................................................4-8
4.3 PC card...............................................................................................................4-10
4.4 SD memory card ................................................................................................4-11
4.5 Connector panel.................................................................................................4-12
4.6 Keyboard............................................................................................................4-13
4.7 Optical drive.......................................................................................................4-16
4.8 Palm rest/Touch pad...........................................................................................4-18
4.8.1 Palm rest .......................................................................................4-18
4.8.2 Touch pad .....................................................................................4-21
4.9 HDD...................................................................................................................4-22
4.10 Memory module .................................................................................................4-24
4.11 Wireless LAN module .......................................................................................4-26
4.12 Internal microphone ...........................................................................................4-27
4.13 MDC module......................................................................................................4-28
4.14 Speaker...............................................................................................................4-29
4.15 Cover assembly..................................................................................................4-31
4.16 RTC battery........................................................................................................4-35
4.17 Battery latch assembly .......................................................................................4-36
4.18 CPU fan..............................................................................................................4-37
4 Replacement Procedures
4-iv PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.19 SD board/System board .....................................................................................4-38
4.19.1 SD board.......................................................................................4-38
4.19.2 System board ................................................................................4-39
4.20 Heat sink/CPU....................................................................................................4-40
4.20.1 Heat sink.......................................................................................4-40
4.20.2 CPU..............................................................................................4-42
4.21 LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board....................................................................4-44
4.22 LCD unit ............................................................................................................4-48
4.23 LCD cable/LED cable ........................................................................................4-51
4.23.1 LCD cable.....................................................................................4-51
4.23.2 LED cable.....................................................................................4-54
4.24 Wireless LAN antenna .......................................................................................4-56
4.25 Hinge assembly..................................................................................................4-58
4.26 Fluorescent lamp................................................................................................4-60
4.26.1 Replacing the 12.1 inch TDM fluorescent lamp ..........................4-61
Figures
Figure 4-1 Removing the battery pack .........................................................................4-8
Figure 4-2 Installing a battery pack..............................................................................4-9
Figure 4-3 Removing the PC card ..............................................................................4-10
Figure 4-4 Removing the SD memory card ...............................................................4-11
Figure 4-5 Removing the connector panel.................................................................4-12
Figure 4-6 Removing the keyboard holder.................................................................4-13
Figure 4-7 Removing the keyboard (1)......................................................................4-14
Figure 4-8 Removing the keyboard (2)......................................................................4-15
Figure 4-9 Removing the optical drive (1) .................................................................4-16
Figure 4-10 Removing the optical drive (2) .................................................................4-17
Figure 4-11 Removing the screw .................................................................................4-18
Figure 4-12 Removing the palm rest ............................................................................4-19
Figure 4-13 Removing the touch pad ...........................................................................4-21
Figure 4-14 Removing the HDD assembly ..................................................................4-22
4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-v
Figure 4-15 Separating the HDD..................................................................................4-23
Figure 4-16 Removing the memory module ................................................................4-24
Figure 4-17 Removing the wireless LAN module .......................................................4-26
Figure 4-18 Removing the internal microphone ..........................................................4-27
Figure 4-19 Removing the MDC module.....................................................................4-28
Figure 4-20 Removing the speakers .............................................................................4-29
Figure 4-21 Removing the cables.................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-22 Removing the screws................................................................................4-32
Figure 4-23 Removing the screw .................................................................................4-33
Figure 4-24 Removing the cover assembly..................................................................4-33
Figure 4-25 Removing the RTC battery.......................................................................4-35
Figure 4-26 Removing the battery latch assembly.......................................................4-36
Figure 4-27 Removing the CPU fan.............................................................................4-37
Figure 4-28 Removing the SD board............................................................................4-38
Figure 4-29 Removing the system board......................................................................4-39
Figure 4-30 Removing the holder and heat sink ..........................................................4-40
Figure 4-31 Applying silicon grease ............................................................................4-41
Figure 4-32 Removing the CPU...................................................................................4-42
Figure 4-33 Installing a CPU........................................................................................4-43
Figure 4-34 Removing the screws and mask seals.......................................................4-44
Figure 4-35 Removing the display mask......................................................................4-45
Figure 4-36 Removing the FL inverter.........................................................................4-45
Figure 4-37 Removing the LED board.........................................................................4-46
Figure 4-38 Removing the screws................................................................................4-48
Figure 4-39 Removing the LCD unit............................................................................4-49
Figure 4-40 Removing the LCD support......................................................................4-50
Figure 4-41 Removing the hinge cap ...........................................................................4-51
Figure 4-42 Removing the LCD cable holder ..............................................................4-52
Figure 4-43 Removing the LCD cable .........................................................................4-52
Figure 4-44 Installing the LCD cable holder................................................................4-53
Figure 4-45 Removing the LED cable..........................................................................4-54
Figure 4-46 Removing the wireless LAN antenna .......................................................4-56
4 Replacement Procedures
4-vi PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Figure 4-47 Removing the wireless LAN antenna cable..............................................4-57
Figure 4-48 Removing the hinge assembly (LCD cover side) .....................................4-58
Figure 4-49 Removing the hinge assembly (base side)................................................4-59
Figure 4-50 to 4-61 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (1) to (12) ...................4-61 to 4-72
4.1 Overview 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-1
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the procedure for removing and replacing the field replaceable units
(FRUs) in the PC. It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one.
The chart below provides a guide as to which other FRUs must be removed before a
particular FRU can be removed. The numbers in the chart indicate the relevant section
numbers in this manual.
In all cases when removing an FRU, the battery pack must also be removed. When repairing
an FRU that is the potential cause of a computer fault, use the chart to determine the order in
which FRUs need to be removed.
?Chart Notation
This chart shows which unit(s)
you need to remove in
advance when you replace one
unit.
Example:
When you wan to replace
HDD, you need to remove
units in the hatched boxes
above the boxes in which the
HDD is.
It is not needed to remove the
Connector panel, Optical
drive, LCD mask/FL inverter
/LED board, LCD unit and
Fluorescent lamp.
4 Replacement Procedures 4.1 Overview
4-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Safety precautions
Please read the following safety instructions before disassembling the computer and always
follow the instructions while working on the computer.
Danger: 1. In the case of the battery, always use authentic parts or equivalent parts
approved by Toshiba. Other batteries may have different specifications that
are incompatible with the computer and may result in fire or explosion.
Due to the risk of alkali fluid leaks, never attempt to heat or disassemble the
battery. Similarly, due to the risk of explosion, never expose the battery to
flame.
2. Some parts including the power supply and FL inverter generate high
voltages. If you need to turn on the power while disassembling the computer,
do not touch any connectors or other components due to the risk of electric
shock. Also, do not disassemble individual parts when performing routine
maintenance.
Warning:1. To prevent electric shock, turn off the power and unplug the AC adapter from
the power source.
2. As the battery installed to the computer is typically already charged, the risk
of electric shock remains even when the AC adapter is unplugged from the
socket. To prevent electric shock, always take off any metal jewelry or
accessories such as necklaces, bracelets or rings before working on the
computer. Never work with wet or moist hands.
3. Take care not to injury yourself on any edges or corners.
Caution: 1. Confirm that replacement parts have compatible specifications before
replacing on the computer. Never use incorrect parts as these may cause
faults on the computer.
2. To prevent internal damage such as short circuits or burning, do not allow
any screws, paper clips, or other metal objects to fall into the computer.
When removing screws, always replace with the same size screw. Ensure that
all screws are fully tightened. Loose screws may result in short circuits
leading to overheating, smoke or flame.
3. To prevent electric shock, check that you have disconnected all cable from a
part before removing the part.
4. When connecting to the AC power supply, use only an AC adapter and cable
approved by Toshiba.
5. To prevent electric shock, ensure that all replacement parts are compatible
with the computer and that all cables and connectors are securely connected.
4.1 Overview 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-3
Before you begin
Take note of the following points before starting work. Always remove the AC adapter and
battery pack before commencing any of the procedures. The procedure for removing the
battery pack is described in section “4.2 Battery Pack”.
1. Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.
2. Use the designated tools.
3. Ensure that the environment for working on and storing parts does not contain any of
the following.
? Dust or dirt
? Static electricity
? Extremely hot, cold, or humid conditions
4. Perform the diagnostic tests described in Chapter 2 to determine which FRU is the
cause of the fault.
5. Do not perform any unnecessary work. Always work in accordance with the
disassembly and re-assembly procedures in this manual.
6. Keep parts removed from the computer in a safe place away from the computer where
they will not be damaged or interfere with your work.
7. Disassembling requires the removal of a large number of screws. Keep removed
screws in a safe place such that you can determine which screws belong to which part.
8. When reassembling, ensure that you use the correct screws and fit parts in the correct
position. Screw sizes are noted in the text and figures.
9. As all parts have sharp edges and corners, take care not to cut yourself.
10. After replacing an FRU, check that the computer and replaced part operate correctly.
4 Replacement Procedures 4.1 Overview
4-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Disassembly procedures
Three main types of cable connector are used.
? Pressure plate connector
? Spring connector
? Normal pin connector
When disconnecting a pressure plate connector, draw the tab on one side of the plastic
pressure plate on the connector and pull the cable out from the connector. When reconnecting
a cable to a pressure plate connector, draw enough the pressure plate and insert the cable into
the connector. Press both sides of the pressure plate such that both sides of the plate and
connector are at the same height and that the cable is fixed in the correct position. Pull the
cable to ensure that it is securely connected. If the cable is disconnected from the connector,
reconnect it making sure that you draw enough the pressure plate to insert fully the cable.
For spring connectors, lifting up the stopper frees the cable and allows it to be pulled out. To
reconnect, hold the stopper in the up position and insert the cable, then lower the stopper to
secure the cable.
Normal pin connectors are used for all other cables. Simply pull out or push in these
connectors to disconnect or reconnect.
Pressure
plate connector
Spring connector
4.1 Overview 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-5
Assembly procedures
After the computer has been disassembled and the part that caused the fault has been repaired
or replaced, the computer must be reassembled.
Take note of the following general points when assembling the computer.
? Take your time and follow the instructions carefully. Hurrying the assembly work
will only introduce new problems.
? Check that all cables and connectors are securely connected.
? Before fastening FRUs or other parts in place, ensure that no cables are caught on
screws or the FRU.
? Check that all latches are securely closed.
? Ensure that you have installed all FRUs correctly and do not have any screws left
over. Using an incorrect screw may damage the thread or screw head and result in the
FRU not being securely fastened in place.
After installing FRUs, check that the computer operates correctly.
Tools and equipment
For your safety and the safety of the people around you, it is important that you use
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment. Correctly utilizing of the equipment increases the
percentage of successful repairs and saves on the cost of damaged or destroyed parts. The
following equipment is required for disassembly and assembly.
? One Philips screwdriver with type 0 bit (for FLAT HEAD screws)
? One Philips screwdriver with type 1 bit (for screws other than above)
? One 4 mm flat-blade screwdriver.
? Tweezers (for holding screws)
? ESD mats (on work table or floor)
? An ESD wrist strap and heel grounder
? Anti-static carpet or flooring
4 Replacement Procedures 4.1 Overview
4-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Screw tightening torque
Use the following torque when tightening screws.
Caution: Overtightening may damage screws or parts. Undertightening may allow screws
to loosen (and possibly fall out) causing a short circuit or other damage.
Note: To tighten screws quickly and accurately, an electric screwdriver is recommended.
? M2 (2mm) 0.167 N?m (1.7 kgf ?cm)
? M2.5 (2.5mm) 0.294 N?m(3.0 kgf?cm)
? M3 (2.5mm) 0.549 N?m(5.6 kgf?cm)
Note: To prevent damage to THIN HEAD screws, use type 0 pit Philips screwdriver.
Use, however, the PH point size “1” screwdriver for screws fixing the expansion
memory slot cover and the keyboard. Press along the axis of the screwdriver while
turning the screw. This is because the contact area between the screw and driver is
less than for a pan head screw (standard pan-shaped screw head).
Grip color
Some screws have a colored grip area to help you determine the length of the screw.
? Even numbered length screws: Brown
? Odd numbered length screws: White
? Special length screw: Blue
“Special length screw” means screws whose length is indicated in
an integral number to the first decimal places such as 2.5 mm, 2.6 mm
and so on.
Grip
4.1 Overview 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-7
Screw notation
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including
the types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.
Format:
Screw shape + Screw length (mm)
Screw shape
B: Bind screw
F: Flat head screw
S: Super thin head screw
T: Tapping screw
U: Other screws (Unique screws: pan head, stud, etc.)
Example:
B6
... 6mm BIND screw
4 Replacement Procedures 4.2 Battery pack
4-8 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.2 Battery pack
Removing the battery pack
The following describes the procedure for removing the battery pack. (See Figure 4-1.)
Caution: Take care not to short circuit the terminals when removing the battery pack.
Similarly, do not drop, knock, scratch, disassemble, twist, or bend the battery
pack.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and all other external devices from the computer.
3. Turn the computer upside down.
4. Release the battery lock.
5. Slide the battery latch in the direction indicated by the arrow and insert your finger
into the slot to lift the battery pack up.
Figure 4-1 Removing the battery pack
Note: Dispose of the used battery pack in accordance with the laws and ordinances of
your local authority.
Battery pack
Battery latch
Battery lock
4.2 Battery pack 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-9
Installing a battery pack
The following describes the procedure for installing a battery pack. (See Figure 4-2.)
Caution: There is a danger that the lithium ion battery pack may explode if not fitted,
operated, handled, or disposed correctly. Dispose always the used batteries
pack in accordance with the laws and ordinances of your local authority. Use
only the batteries approved by Toshiba.
Note: Check visually the battery terminals and clean off any dirt with a dry cloth.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Connect the AC adapter and all other external devices to the computer.
3. Turn the computer upside down.
4. Install the battery pack into the connector of the computer in the direction indicated
by the arrow. Press the battery until it is locked.
5. Lock the battery lock by lifting it up.
Figure 4-2 Installing a battery pack
Battery pack
Battery lock
4 Replacement Procedures 4.3 PC card
4-10 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.3 PC card
Removing the PC card
The following describes the procedure for removing the PC card. (See Figure 4-3.)
Caution: Insert or remove the PC card in accordance with any instructions in the PC
card manual or the manuals of the computer system you are using.
1. Push the eject button. It will pop out when you release it. Press it once more to eject
the PC card.
2. Pull out the PC card and remove it.
Figure 4-3 Removing the PC card
Installing a PC card
The following describes the procedure for installing a PC card. (See Figure 4-3)
1. Make sure the eject button does not stick out.
2. Insert the PC card and press it until it is securely connected.
Eject button
PC card
4.4 SD memory card 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-11
4.4 SD memory card
Removing the SD memory card
The following describes the procedure for removing the SD memory card. (See Figure 4-4.)
Caution: Insert or remove the SD memory card in accordance with any instructions in
the SD memory card manual or the manuals of the computer system you are
using.
1. Push the SD memory card. It will pop out partly when you release, so pull out the
card.
Figure 4-4 Removing the SD memory card
Installing a SD memory card
The following procedure describes the procedure for installing a SD memory card.
(See Figure 4-4.)
1. Insert the SD memory card and press it until it is securely connected.
SD memory card
4 Replacement Procedures 4.5 Connector panel
4-12 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.5 Connector panel
Removing the connector panel
The following describes the procedure for removing the connector panel. (See Figure 4-5.)
1. Open the connector panel.
2. Push the center of the connector panel to bend it and remove the connector panel.
Figure 4-5 Removing the connector panel
Installing a connector panel
The following describes the procedure for installing a connector panel. (See Figure 4-5.)
1. Bend slightly the connector panel at the center. Insert the ends (projections) of
connector panel to the two installing holes of the base.
2. Close the connector panel.
Connector panel
4.6 Keyboard 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-13
4.6 Keyboard
Removing the keyboard
The following describes the procedure for removing the keyboard. (See Figure 4-6 to 4-8.)
1. Open the display.
2. Insert your fingers into the slots at both the sides and lift up the keyboard holder.
Figure 4-6 Removing the keyboard holder
Keyboard holder
Slot
Slot
4 Replacement Procedures 4.6 Keyboard
4-14 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3. Remove the following screws fixing the keyboard.
? M2?3S S-THIN HEAD screw ?3
4. Lift the upper side of the keyboard and pull down to the front.
Figure 4-7 Removing the keyboard (1)
Keyboard
M2?3S S-THIN HEAD
4.6 Keyboard 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-15
5. Remove the keyboard flexible cable from the connector PJ3230 on the system board.
6. Remove the keyboard.
Figure 4-8 Removing the keyboard (2)
Installing a keyboard
The following describes the procedure for installing a keyboard. (See Figure 4-6 to 4-8.)
1. Set the keyboard on the palm rest with the back up and connect the keyboard flexible
cable to the connector PJ3230 on the system board.
2. Turn the keyboard face up and set it while inserting the latches under the palm rest.
3. Fix the keyboard with the following screws.
? M2?3S S-THIN HEAD screw ?3
4. Hook the latches at the back of the keyboard holder first and push down the front side
of the keyboard holder.
PJ3230
Keyboard flexible cable
4 Replacement Procedures 4.7 Optical drive
4-16 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.7 Optical drive
Removing the optical drive
The following describes the procedure for removing the optical drive. (See Figure 4-9 and 4-
10.)
1. Remove the following screw fixing the optical drive.
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?1
Figure 4-9 Removing the optical drive (1)
M2.5
?
12B FLAT HEAD
4.7 Optical drive 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-17
2. Turn over the computer and insert a screwdriver into the hole from the space for a
battery pack to push the rear of the optical drive.
Figure 4-10 Removing the optical drive (2)
Caution: Be careful not to damage the computer by the driver.
Installing an optical drive
The following describes the procedure for installing an optical drive. (See Figure 4-9 and 4-
10.)
1. Insert the optical drive into the slot and push it slowly until it is surely connected to
the system board.
2. Turn over the computer and fix the optical drive with the following screw.
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?1
Optical drive
Driver
Hole for removing optical drive
4 Replacement Procedures 4.8 Palm rest/Touch pad
4-18 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.8 Palm rest/Touch pad
4.8.1 Palm rest
Removing the palm rest
The following describes the procedure for removing the palm rest. (See Figure 4-11 and 4-
12.)
Caution: The touch pad is stuck to the palm rest with adhesives, so it can not be
removed. When a touch pad is broken, replace a palm rest with a touch pad.
1. Turn over the computer and remove the following screw fixing the palm rest.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
Figure 4-11 Removing the screw
M2?3C S-THIN HEAD
4.8 Palm rest/Touch pad 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-19
2. Turn the computer face up and remove the flat cable from the connector PJ3240 on
the system board.
3. Remove the following screws fixing the palm rest.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?1
Figure 4-12 Removing the palm rest
4. Remove the two latches on the upper side of palm rest and remove the palm rest
toward the left upper.
PJ32
40
M2?3C S-THIN HEAD
Palm rest
M2.5
?
12B FLAT HEAD
M2
?
3C S
-
THIN HEAD
Slide bar
4 Replacement Procedures 4.8 Palm rest/Touch pad
4-20 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Installing a palm rest
The following describes the procedure for installing a palm rest. (See Figure 4-11 and 4-12.)
1. Set the palm rest from the left side while guiding the two holes of the palm rest to the
audio jacks.
Caution: When setting the palm rest, fit the position of wireless LAN switch on the
system board and the position of slider on the palm rest.
2. Fix the palm rest with the following screws.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?1
3. Connect the flat cable to the connector PJ 3240 on the system board.
4. Turn over the computer and fix the palm rest with the following screw.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
4.8 Palm rest/Touch pad 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-21
4.8.2 Touch pad
Removing the touch pad
The following describes the procedure for removing the touch pad (board). (See Figure 4-13.)
1. Remove the following screws and the touch pad.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?5
2. Remove the touch pad button.
Figure 4-13 Removing the touch pad
Installing a touch pad
The following describes the procedure for installing a touch pad (board). (See Figure 4-13.)
1. Set the touch pad button.
2. Install the touch pad and fix it with the following screws.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?5
Touch pad
M2?3C S-THIN HEAD
M2?3C S-THIN HEAD
Touch pad button
M2?3C S-THIN HEAD
4 Replacement Procedures 4.9 HDD
4-22 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.9 HDD
Removing the HDD
The following describes the procedure for removing the HDD. (See Figure 4-14 and 4-15.)
Caution: Take care not to press on the top or bottom of the HDD. Pressure may cause
data loss or damage to the device.
1. Remove the following screw fixing the HDD slot cover and remove the cover.
? M2.5?8B FLAT HEAD screw ?1
2. Hold the HDD tab and pull out the HDD assembly.
Figure 4-14 Removing the HDD assembly
HDD cover
Tab
M2.5?8B FLAT HEAD
HDD assembly
4.9 HDD 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-23
3. Remove the following screws fixing the HDD bracket.
? M3?4S FLAT HEAD screw ?4
4. Separate the HDD bracket from the HDD.
Figure 4-15 Separating the HDD
Installing a HDD
The following describes the procedure for installing a HDD. (See Figure 4-14 and 4-15.)
1. Fix the HDD bracket to the HDD with the following screws.
? M3?4S FLAT HEAD screw ?4
2. Insert the HDD assembly into the HDD slot with care of the direction. Insert the tab
into the gap between the chassis of the computer and the HDD assembly.
3. Install the HDD cover from the bottom of the computer and fix it with the following
screw.
? M2.5?8B FLAT HEAD screw ?1
M3?4S FLAT HEAD
HDD bracket
HDD
M3?4S FLAT HEAD
4 Replacement Procedures 4.10 Memory module
4-24 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.10 Memory module
Caution: The power must be turned off when you remove the memory module.
Removing a memory module with the power on risks damaging the module or
the computer itself.
Do not touch the memory module terminals. Any dirt on the terminals may
cause memory access problems.
Never press hard or bend the memory module.
Removing the memory module
To remove the memory module(s), confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then perform
the following procedure. (See Figure 4-16.)
1. Turn up the insulator and open the latches fixing the memory module.
2. Remove the memory module.
Figure 4-16 Removing the memory module
Memory (slot A)
Memory (slot B)
Latch
Latch
Insulator
4.10 Memory module 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-25
Installing a memory module
To install a memory module(s), confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then perform the
following procedure. (See Figure 4-16.)
1. Turn up the insulator and insert the memory module into the connector of the
computer slantwise with the label up.
2. Push down the memory module until it is latched firmly
Caution: The power must be turned off when you insert the memory module. Inserting a
memory module with the power on risks damaging the module or the computer
itself.
Do not install a memory module in slot B only. Use slot A prior to slot B.
Otherwise, the computer or the memory may be damaged.
Never press hard or bend the memory module.
4 Replacement Procedures 4.11 Wireless LAN module
4-26 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.11 Wireless LAN module
Removing the wireless LAN module
To remove the wireless LAN module, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-17.)
1. Peel off the glass tape on the wireless LAN antenna cables.
2. Remove the white and black antenna cables from the wireless LAN module using a
dedicated jig.
3. Open the latches fixing the wireless LAN module and remove the wireless LAN
module.
Figure 4-17 Removing the wireless LAN module
Installing a wireless LAN module
To install a wireless LAN module, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-17.)
1. Insert the wireless LAN module into the connector of the computer slantwise.
2. Push down the wireless LAN module until it is latched firmly.
Wireless LAN module
Latch
Antenna cable (white)
Glass tape
Antenna cable (black)
4.11 Wireless LAN module 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-27
3. Connect the white and black antenna cables and fix them with the glass tape.
4 Replacement Procedures 4.12 Internal microphone
4-28 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.12 Internal microphone
Removing the internal microphone
To remove the internal microphone, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-18.)
1. Peel off the glass tape fixing the internal microphone cable.
2. Remove the internal microphone cable from the connector PJ6000 on the system
board.
3. Remove the internal microphone from the slot.
Figure 4-18 Removing the internal microphone
Installing an internal microphone
To installing an internal microphone, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-18.)
1. Insert the internal microphone into the slot.
2. Connect the internal microphone cable to the connector PJ6000 on the system
board.
3. Set the internal microphone cable into the slot and fix it with a glass tape.
PJ6000
Internal microphone
Glass tape
Inter
nal microphone cable
4.13 MDC module 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-29
4.13 MDC module
Removing the MDC module
To remove the MDC module, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-19.)
1. Remove the following screws fixing the MDC module.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
2. Remove the MDC module from the connector PJ3010 on the system board.
3. Disconnect the MDC cable from the MDC module.
Figure 4-19 Removing the MDC module
Installing a MDC module
To install a MDC module, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-19.)
1. Connect the MDC cable to the MDC module.
2. Install the MDC module to the connector PJ3010 on the system board.
3. Fix the MDC module with the following screws.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
MDC module
M2
?
4Z S
-
THIN HEAD
MDC cable
PJ3010
4.14 Speaker 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-29
4 Replacement Procedures
4.14 Speaker
Removing the speaker
To remove the speakers, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-20.)
1. Remove the following screws fixing the speakers
? M2?3S S-THIN HEAD screw ?4
Figure 4-20 Removing the speakers
M2
?
3S
S
-
THIN HEAD
PJ6003
Speaker
Speaker
Insulator
Glass tape
Insulator
Speaker cable
4 Replacement Procedures 4.14 Speaker
4-30 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2. Disconnect the speaker cable from the connector PJ6003 on the system board.
3. Peel off the four insulators and one glass tape and remove the speakers and speaker
cable.
Installing a speaker
To remove a speaker, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-20.)
1. Set the speakers in place and fix them with the following screws.
? M2?3S S-THIN HEAD screw ?4
2. Connect the speaker cable to the connector PJ6003 on the system board and stick the
glass tape.
3. Place the speaker cable into the cable slot and stick the four insulators.
4.15 Cover assembly 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-31
4.15 Cover assembly
Removing the cover assembly
To remove the cover assembly, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-21 to 4-24.)
1. Remove the LCD cable from the connector PJ5600 on the system board.
Figure 4-21 Removing the cables
PJ5600
LCD cable
4 Replacement Procedures 4.15 Cover assembly
4-32 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2. Remove the following screws.
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?5 (?)
? M2.5?8B BIND screw ?8 (?)
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD screw ?2 (?)
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?1 (?’)
(When the optical drive is not removed.)
Figure 4-22 Removing the screws
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?’
?
4.15 Cover assembly 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-33
3. Turn over the computer and remove the following screw in the battery slot.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
Figure 4-23 Removing the screw
4. Release the latches of the cover assembly and remove the cover assembly
5. Remove the LED cable from the connector PJ9500 on the system board.
Figure 4-24 Removing the cover assembly
M2
?
3
C S
-
THIN HEAD
Latch
Cover assembly
PJ9500
LED cable
4 Replacement Procedures 4.15 Cover assembly
4-34 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Installing a cover assembly
To install a cover assembly, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-21 to 4-24.)
1. Connect the LED cable to the connector PJ9500 on the system board.
2. Mount the cover assembly on the base assembly while engaging the latches.
3. Fix the cover assembly with the following screws.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
(in the battery slot)
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?5 (?)
? M2.5?8B BIND screw ?8 (?)
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD screw ?2 (?)
? M2.5?12B FLAT HEAD screw ?1 (?’)
(When the optical drive is not removed.)
4. Connect the LCD cable to the connectors PJ5600 on the system board.
4.16 RTC battery 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-35
4.16 RTC battery
Removing the RTC battery
To remove the RTC battery, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-25.)
1. Peel off the glass tape and disconnect the RTC battery cable from the connector
PJ8760 on the system board.
2. Remove the RTC battery and cushion.
Figure 4-25 Removing the RTC battery
Installing a RTC battery
To install a RTC battery, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-25.)
1. Connect the RTC battery cable to the connector PJ8760 on the system board.
2. Set the RTC battery and cushion into the slot and put the RTC battery cable into
the space between the fan and system board.
3. Stick the glass tape.
Caution: Be careful not to stick the glass tape on the GND pattern.
RTC battery
PJ8760
Glass tape
RTC battery cable
Cushion
GND pattern
4 Replacement Procedures 4.17 Battery latch assembly
4-36 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.17 Battery latch assembly
Removing the battery latch assembly
To remove the battery latch assembly, perform the following procedures. (See Figure 4-26.)
1. Remove the following screws.
? M2.5?6 Tapping screw ?2
2. Remove the battery latch assembly.
Figure 4-26 Removing the battery latch assembly
Installing a battery latch assembly
To install a battery latch assembly, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-26.)
1. Place the battery latch assembly and fix it with the following screws.
? M2.5?6 Tapping screw ?2
Battery latch assembly
M2.5
?
6
Tapping
4.18 CPU fan 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-37
4.18 CPU fan
Removing the CPU fan
To remove the CPU fan, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-27.)
1. Disconnect the fan cable from the connector PJ8770 on the system board.
2. Remove the following screws fixing the CPU fan.
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD screw ?2
3. Remove the CPU fan from the base assembly.
Figure 4-27 Removing the CPU fan
Installing a CPU fan
To install a CPU fan, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-27.)
1. Install the CPU fan to the base assembly and fix it with the following screws.
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD screw ?2
2. Connect the fan cable to the connector PJ8770 on the system board. Put the fan
cable into the space between the fan and system board.
CPU fan
M2.5
?
4B FLAT HEAD
PJ8770
4 Replacement Procedures 4.19 SD board/System board
4-38 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.19 SD board/System board
4.19.1 SD board
Removing the SD board
To remove the SD board, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-28.)
1. Disconnect the SD cable from the connector PJ 9550 on the system board and from
the connector PJ9555 on the SD board.
2. Remove the SD board.
Figure 4-28 Removing the SD board
Installing a SD board
To install a SD board, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-28.)
1. Connect the SD cable to the connector PJ9555 on the SD board.
2. Connect the SD cable to the connector PJ 9550 on the system board and set the SD
board in place.
PJ9555
SD board
SD cable
PJ9550
4.19 SD board/System board 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-39
4.19.2 System board
Removing the system board
To remove the system board, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-29.)
1. Lift up the right side of the system board and remove the system board in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Figure 4-29 Removing the system board
Installing a system board
To install a system board, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-29.)
1. Set the system board (by the left side first) on the cover.
System board
4 Replacement Procedures 4.20 Heat sink/CPU
4-40 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.20 Heat sink/CPU
4.20.1 Heat sink
Removing the heat sink
To remove the heat sink, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-30.)
1. Remove the following screws fixing the holder and remove the holder and heat sink.
? M2?4Z BIND screw ?3
Figure 4-30 Removing the holder and heat sink
M2x4Z BIND
Heat sink
Holder
4.20 Heat sink/CPU 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-41
Installing a heat sink
To install a heat sink, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-30 and 4-31.)
1. When silicon grease has already been applied to the heat sink (fin) and face of CPU,
remove them cleanly with a soft cloth. Apply silicon grease to the heat sink (fin) and
face of the CPU by a dedicated injector. The face of CPU chip shall be covered
completely with silicon grease.
Caution: When using a dedicated injector, completely cover the face of CPU chip with
silicon grease.
Figure 4-31 Applying silicon grease
2. Set the heat sink on the CPU in place. Fix the holder with the following screws.
? M2?4Z BIND screw ?3
Grease
4 Replacement Procedures 4.20 Heat sink/CPU
4-42 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.20.2 CPU
Removing the CPU
Caution: The temperature of CPU may become high. Be sure to work after it has
become low.
To remove the CPU perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-32.)
1. Turn the cam counterclockwise 180 degrees with a flat-blade screwdriver to release
the lock.
2. Remove the CPU.
Figure 4-32 Removing the CPU
Cam
4.20 Heat sink/CPU 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-43
Installing a CPU
To install a CPU perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-33.)
1. Make sure the cam is in the open position.
2. Set the CPU in place on the CPU socket.
Caution: When setting the CPU on the socket, make sure that the triangle mark on
the CPU comes to the right position. (Refer to the figure below.)
Figure 4-33 Installing a CPU
3. Turn the cam clockwise 180 degrees with a flat-blade screwdriver to fix the CPU.
Cam
Mark
4 Replacement Procedures 4.21 LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board
4-44 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.21 LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board
Removing the LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board
To remove the LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board, perform the following procedure. (See
Figure 4-34 to 4-37.)
1. Peel off the two mask seals and remove the following screws.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
Figure 4-34 Removing the screws and mask seals
M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD
Mask seal
4.21 LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-45
2. Remove the display mask from the bottom while releasing the latches.
Figure 4-35 Removing the display mask
3. Remove the following screw fixing the FL inverter. Disconnect the FL cable and
HV cable from the FL inverter.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
Figure 4-36 Removing the FL inverter
Display mask
M2
?
4Z S
-
THIN HEAD
FL inverter
FL cabl
e
HV cable
4 Replacement Procedures 4.21 LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board
4-46 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4. Remove the following screws fixing the LED board. Disconnect the LED cable from
the connector and remove the LED board.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
Figure 4-37 Removing the LED board
LED board
M2
?
4Z
S
-
THIN HEAD
LED cable
4.21 LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-47
Installing a LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board
To install a LCD mask/FL inverter/LED board, perform the following procedure. (See Figure
4-34 to 4-37.)
1. Connect the LED cable to the connector of the LED board.
Caution: Put the LED cable into the space between the FL inverter and LED board. Be
careful not to pinch the cables.
2. Set the LED board in place and fix it with the following screws.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
3. Connect the FL cable and HV cable to the connector of the FL inverter.
4. Set the FL inverter and fix it with the following screw.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
5. Mount the display mask and push to lock all the latches.
6. Fix the display mask with the following screws and stick the mask seals.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?2
4 Replacement Procedures 4.22 LCD unit
4-48 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.22 LCD unit
Removing the LCD unit
To remove the LCD unit, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-38 to 4-40.)
1. Remove the following screws fixing the LCD unit.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?6
Figure 4-38 Removing the screws
M2
?
4Z S
-
THIN
HEAD
M2
?
4Z S
-
THIN
HEAD
4.22 LCD unit 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-49
2. Peel off the glass tape on the LCD connector on the back of the LCD unit.
3. Disconnect the LCD cable and remove the LCD unit.
Figure 4-39 Removing the LCD unit
LCD unit
LCD cable
Glass tape
4 Replacement Procedures 4.22 LCD unit
4-50 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4. Remove the following screws and detach the LCD supports from the LCD unit.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?4
Figure 4-40 Removing the LCD support
Installing a LCD unit
To install a LCD unit, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-38 to 4-40.)
1. Set the LCD supports to the LCD unit and fix them with the following screws.
? M2?3C S-THIN HEAD screw ?4
Caution: The shape of the right LCD support is different from the one of the left. Use
the correct LCD support.
2. Connect the LCD cable to the connector on the back of the LCD unit and fix it with
the glass tape.
3. Set the LCD unit on the LCD cover with the guide into the guide hole and fix it with
the following screws.
? M2?4Z S-THIN HEAD screw ?6
M2
?
3C S
-
THIN HEAD
M2
?
3C S
-
THIN HEAD
LCD support (right)
LCD support (left)
4.23 LCD cable/LED cable 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-51
4.23 LCD cable/LED cable
4.23.1 LCD cable
Removing the LCD cable
To remove the LCD cable, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-41 to 4-43.)
1. Peel off the acetate tape fixing the LCD cable.
2. Remove the following screw and left side hinge cap (viewing from the front).
? M2.5?6S S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
3. Remove the following screw and LCD cable GND wire.
? M2?3SC S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
Figure 4-41 Removing the hinge cap
Hinge cap
M2.5
?
6S S
-
THIN HEAD
M2
?
3SC S
-
THIN HEAD
LCD cable GND wire
Acetate tape
4 Replacement Procedures 4.23 LCD cable/LED cable
4-52 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4. Remove the following screws and LCD cable holder (on the back of the cover
assembly).
? M2.5?4S FLAT HEAD screw ?2
Figure 4-42 Removing the LCD cable holder
5. Take out the LCD cable through the hinge hole.
Figure 4-43 Removing the LCD cable
M2.5
?
4S FLAT HEAD
LCD cable holder
LCD cable
4.23 LCD cable/LED cable 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-53
Installing a LCD cable
To install a LCD cable, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-41 to 4-44.)
1. Pass the LCD cable through the hinge hole to the system board side.
2. Install the LCD cable holder (back of the cover assembly) and fix it with the
following screws. Put the LCD cable holder under the guide.
? M2.5?4S FLAT HEAD screw ?2
Figure 4-44 Installing the LCD cable holder
3. Align the forked portion of the LCD cable to the hinge cap and install the hinge cap.
Fix the hinge cap with the following screw.
? M2.5?6S S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
Caution: Do not pinch the LCD cable between the hinge cap and the cover assembly.
Be careful not to miss the direction of the hinge cap.
4. Fix the LCD cable GND wire with the following screw.
? M2?3SC S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
5. Fix the LCD cable with the acetate tape.
Guide
LCD cable holder
4 Replacement Procedures 4.23 LCD cable/LED cable
4-54 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.23.2 LED cable
Removing the LED cable
To remove the LED cable, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-45.)
1. Remove the following screw and right side hinge cap (viewing from the front).
? M2.5?6B S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
2. Peel the insulator (back of the cover assembly) fixing the LED cable.
3. Take the LED cable out from the hinge hole.
Figure 4-45 Removing the LED cable
M2.5
?
6B S
-
THIN HEAD
Hinge cap
LED cable
LED cable
Insulator
4.23 LCD cable/LED cable 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-55
Installing a LED cable
To install a LED cable, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-45.)
1. Pass the LED cable through the hinge hole to the system board side.
2. Install the hinge cap and fix it with the following screw. Do not pinch the LED cable
between the hinge cap and the cover assembly. Be careful not to miss the direction of
the hinge cap.
? M2.5?6B S-THIN HEAD screw ?1
3. Align the white mark on the LED cable to the hinge cap and stick the insulator (back
of the cover assembly) on the LED cable.
4 Replacement Procedures 4.24 Wireless LAN antenna
4-56 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.24 Wireless LAN antenna
Removing the wireless LAN antenna
To remove the wireless LAN antenna, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-46 and
4-47.)
1. Peel off the four acetate tapes and wireless LAN antennas.
Figure 4-46 Removing the wireless LAN antenna
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna
4.24 Wireless LAN antenna 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-57
2. Peel off the one acetate tape and four insulators and take out the wireless LAN
antenna cables from the hinge hole.
Figure 4-47 Removing the wireless LAN antenna cable
Installing a wireless LAN antenna
To install a wireless LAN antenna, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-46 and 4-
47.)
1. Pass the wireless LAN antenna cables through the hinge hole and lay down the
cable in place. Fix the wireless LAN antenna cables with the one acetate tape and
four insulators.
2. Stick the wireless LAN antennas on the LCD cover in place and fix the antenna
cables with the acetate tapes at four points.
Caution: When installing antenna cables, do not cross them on the LCD cover.
Insulator
Wireless LAN antenna
cable
Acetate tape
4 Replacement Procedures 4.25 Hinge assembly
4-58 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.25 Hinge assembly
Removing the hinge assembly
To remove the hinge assembly, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-48 and 4-49)
1. Remove the following screws fixing the hinge assemblies on the LCD cover side.
? M2.5?6 Tapping screw ?2 (left?1, right?1)
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD ?2 (left?1, right?1)
Figure 4-48 Removing the hinge assembly (LCD cover side)
2. Remove the following screws fixing the hinge assemblies on the base side.
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD ?4
Caution: Silicon grease is applied to screws on the base side. Drive the screws a little
strongly.
M2.5
?
6 Tapping
Hinge assembly
Hinge assembly
M2.5
?
4B FLAT HEAD
M2.5
?
4B FLAT HEAD
4.25 Hinge assembly 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-59
3. Take both the hinge assemblies out from the holes of the base.
Figure 4-49 Removing the hinge assembly (base side)
Installing a hinge assembly
To install a hinge assembly, perform the following procedure. (See Figure 4-48 and 4-49.)
1. Fix the hinge assemblies to the LCD cover with the following screws.
? M2.5?6 Tapping screw ?2 (left?1, right?1)
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD ?2 (left?1, right?1)
2. Fix the hinge assemblies to the base with the following screws.
? M2.5?4B FLAT HEAD ?4
Caution: When fixing the hinge assembly, use new screws and apply Locktight to them.
M2.5
?
4B FLAT HEAD
Hinge assembly
Hinge assembly
M2.5
?
4B FLAT HEAD
4 Replacement Procedures 4.26 Fluorescent lamp
4-60 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4.26 Fluorescent lamp
This system uses LCD modules from the following suppliers. The procedure for replacing the
fluorescent lamp assembly (hereafter refer to fluorescent lamp) is different for each LCD
module. Refer to the appropriate procedure.
Type Part.No Supplier Section
12.1 inch G33C0000J210 TMD 4.26.1
Note: 1.When working with a LCD module, always use a flat, grounded table.
2. Handle the backlight unit in the environment without dust, such as on the clean
bench. Keep the worktable free from any screws or other material that may
scratch the LCD surface.
3. Use an anti-static or protective sheet.
4. When replacing the FL unit, cover with a finger protector or similar to prevent
dirtying or scratching the LCD panel.
5. Take care when handling the lamp. Excessive force may break the lamp.
6. Take care not to dirty or deform the lamp reflector.
7. Ensure always that the power of the LCD module is turned off before connecting
or disconnecting cables and connectors.
4.26 Fluorescent lamp 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-61
4.26.1 Replacing the 12.1 inch TMD fluorescent lamp
The following describes the procedure for replacing the fluorescent lamp. (See Figure 4-50 to
4-61.)
Disassembling the module
1. Peeling of tape and insulating sheet
<Procedure>
1) Put quietly the module on a flat plate without foreign objects with the front up.
Check for dusts on the desk to protect the module from being scratched. Put a
protection sheet (soft cloth) on the surface.
2) Peel off two tapes fixing FL cable and one bezel tape on the lamp side in order.
Caution: Be careful not to damage the TAB.
Figure 4-50 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(1)
Tape fixing F
L cable
Bezel tape on the lamp
side
4 Replacement Procedures 4.26 Fluorescent lamp
4-62 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3) Peel off one X-PCB insulating sheet and spread it without it out of the side of bezel.
Caution: 1. Keep the X-PCB insulating sheet being on the bezel.
2. Be careful not to damage the TAB.
Figure 4-51 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (2)
X
-
PCB insulating sheet
4.26 Fluorescent lamp 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-63
2. Removing screws
<Procedure>
1) Remove 4 screws on the side of left and the side of right.
Caution: When removing screws, use a Phillips screwdriver with bit of No.0.
Figure 4-52 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(3)
4 Replacement Procedures 4.26 Fluorescent lamp
4-64 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3. Removing bezel
<Procedure>
1) Turn over the module with the insulating sheet.
2) Releases latches of the bezel and frame (3 points).
3) Lift up slowly the bottom side (Back light side) of bezel and release latches (3
points)at the upper to remove the bezel. Note that the bezels at the upper and lower
are fixed with double-sides tape.
Caution: 1. When releasing the upper latches, do not damage the TAB.
2. When removing the bezel, do not deform the bezel.
Figure 4-53 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(4)
Latches
4.26 Fluorescent lamp 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-65
4. Opening PCB
<Procedure>
1) Open the PCB horizontally.
Caution: Do not damage the TAB.
Figure 4-54 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(5)
Open the X-PCB from the back
4 Replacement Procedures 4.26 Fluorescent lamp
4-66 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
5. Removing PCB-ASSY cell
<Procedure>
1) Remove the PCB-ASSY cell from the back light unit.
2) Remove thoroughly remaining double-sided tape on the back of cell.
Caution: 1. One point of the upper of cell is fixed with double sided tape. Peel off
slowly so as not to break the cell.
2. Be careful not to peel off the light-shield tape at the upper, lower, right
and left.
Figure 4-55 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(6)
Cell with PCB
Remove the cell while peeling
off the double -sided tape
(1 point).
4.26 Fluorescent lamp 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-67
Assembling the module
1. Checking back light for replacement
<Check>
1) Refer to the following figure.
Figure 4-56 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(7)
The sheet shall not be out of the frame.
4 Replacement Procedures 4.26 Fluorescent lamp
4-68 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
2. Assembling PCB ASSY
<Procedure>
1) Back light unit for replacement
Remove the peeled-tape on the double-sided tape at the upper of frame.
2) Light the backlight on.
3) Make sure that there is no dust, foreign object, scratch and like that on the
backlight and the back of cell. Set the PCB-ASSY cell on the back light unit.
Caution: 1. Push it as far as it will go at the left upper.
2. Do not damage the TAB.
Figure 4-57 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(8)
Cell with PCB
Back light unit
Remove the peeled tape
on the double-sided tape
Push as far as it will go.
4.26 Fluorescent lamp 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-69
3. Folding TAB/PCB and temporal fixing
<Procedure>
1) Fold the X-TAB(X-PCB) to the back of back light unit.
Caution: Do not damage the TAB.
Figure 4-58 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(9)
Fold the X
-
PCB to the back.
4 Replacement Procedures 4.26 Fluorescent lamp
4-70 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
4. Bezel set
<Procedure>
1) Hook the upper side (TAB side) of bezel to the three latches of frame. ?
2) Latch the side.
3) Mate the lamp side. ?
Caution: 1. Do not damage the TAB.
2. Make sure the three latches of bezel are hooked.
3. The PCB GND-CU shall be within the bezel.
Figure 4-59 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(10)
Folding of reflector
shall be within bezel.
PCB GND
-
CU shall be
within bezel.
PCB GND
-
CU shall
be within the bezel.
?
?
?
?
4.26 Fluorescent lamp 4 Replacement Procedures
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) 4-71
5. Fixing PCB and bezel with screws
<Procedure>
1) Fix the right side ( 2 points, viewing from the back) with screws in order of ? and
?.
2) Fix the left side ( 2 points, viewing from the back) with screws in order of ? and
?.
Caution: 1. Keep the order of screwing. No floating shall be.
2. The torque of screw driving shall be 0.1666N/m (1.7Kgf.cm).
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver with the bit of No.
Figure 4-60 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(11)
?
?
?
?
4 Replacement Procedures 4.26 Fluorescent lamp
4-72 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
6. Sticking tape and insulating sheet
<Procedure>
1) Stick the X-PCB insulating sheet. ?
2) Stick the lower side (lamp side) of bezel tape.?
3) Stick the FL cable tape.??
Caution: 1. When sticking the insulating sheet, do no bend it.
2. When sticking tape and insulating sheet, do not damage the leading part of
lamp cable and let not it out of the display part.
Figure 4-61 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp(12)
Sticking X
-
PCB insulating
sheet
?
Standard for sticking FL cable tape: Stick it
making the second scribed line from the
center of display as a guide
Standard for sticking
FL cable tape:
Stick it making the outline of bezel a
guide
Standard for sticking bezel tape:
Stick it between scribed lines.
?
?
?
Appendices
Appendices
App-ii PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) App-iii
Appendix Contents
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ...........................................................................A-1
Appendix B Board Layout.................................................................................................B-1
B.1 System Board (FPYSY*) Front View.......................................................................B-1
B.2 System Board (FPYSY*) Back View.......................................................................B-3
B.3 SD Board (FPYSD*) View......................................................................................B-5
B.4 LED Board (FPYLE*) View....................................................................................B-6
Appendix C Pin Assignments ............................................................................................C-1
C.1 PJ1420 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)............................................................. C-1
C.2 PJ1440 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)............................................................. C-5
C.3 PJ1800 HDD I/F connector (44-pin)..................................................................... C-9
C.4 PJ1801 Optical drive I/F connector (50-pin)....................................................... C-10
C.5 PJ2110 PC card I/F connector (68-pin) .............................................................. C-11
C.6 PJ2130 SD card I/F connector (12-pin) .............................................................. C-12
C.7 PJ2200 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin)........................................................... C-13
C.8 PJ3010 MDC I/F connector (30-pin).................................................................. C-15
C.9 PJ3230 Keyboard I/F connector (30-pin) ........................................................... C-16
C.10 PJ3240 PAD I/F connector (5-pin) ..................................................................... C-16
C.11 PJ4100 Network I/F connector (14-pin) ............................................................. C-17
C.12 PJ4200 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)..................................................................... C-17
C.13 PJ4400 Bluetooth connector (20-pin).................................................................. C-18
C.14 PJ4700 USB Port 0/1 connector (8-pin) ............................................................. C-18
C.15 PJ4701 USB Port 2 connector (4-pin) ................................................................ C-18
C.16 PJ5600 LCD connector (40-pin)......................................................................... C-19
C.17 PJ5620 CRT I/F connector (15-pin) ................................................................... C-20
C.18 PJ5640 TV out connector (4-pin)........................................................................ C-20
C.19 PJ6003 Speaker Connector (4-pin)..................................................................... C-20
C.20 PJ8800 DC-IN Connector (2-pin) ...................................................................... C-21
Appendices
App-iv PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
C.21 PJ8810 Main battery connector (10-pin) ............................................................. C-21
C.22 PJ8760 RTC battery connector (3-pin) ............................................................... C-21
C.23 PJ8770 Fan connector (3-pin)............................................................................. C-21
C.24 PJ9500 LED board I/F connector (20-pin).......................................................... C-22
C.25 PJ9550 SD board I/F connector (20-pin)............................................................ C-22
C.26 PJ9505 System board I/F connector (20-pin)...................................................... C-23
C.27 PJ9555 System board I/F connector (20-pin)...................................................... C-24
C.28 PJ6000 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin).................................................... C-24
C.29 PJ6001 External Microphone connector (6-pin)................................................... C-24
C.30 PJ6002 Headphone connector (6-pin)................................................................. C-25
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes................................................................ D-1
Appendix E Key Layout ....................................................................................................E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams ...........................................................................................F-1
F.1 LAN Loopback Connector ......................................................................................F-1
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures ........................................................................... G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures...................................................................... H-1
Appendix I Reliability........................................................................................................I-1
Appendix J Key FD........................................................................................................... J-1
Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) App-v
Figures
Figure B-1 System board (FPYSY*) layout (front)...............................................................B-1
Figure B-2 System board (FPYSY*) layout (back)...............................................................B-3
Figure B-3 SD board (FPYSD*) layout................................................................................B-5
Figure B-4 LED board (FPYLE*) layout..............................................................................B-6
Figure E-1 Key Layout (US)................................................................................................E-1
Figure E-2 Key Layput (UK)...............................................................................................E-1
Figure F-1 LAN loopback connector...................................................................................F-1
Tables
Table B-1 System board (FPYSY*) ICs and connectors (front)...........................................B-2
Table B-2 System board (FPYSY*) ICs and connectors (back)..........................................B-4
Table B-3 SD board (FPYSD*) ICs and connectors...........................................................B-5
Table B-4 LED board (FPYLE*) ICs and connectors .........................................................B-6
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)...................................................................... C-1
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)...................................................................... C-5
Table C-3 HDD I/F connector (44-pin).............................................................................. C-9
Table C-4 Optical drive I/F connector (50-pin)................................................................. C-10
Table C-5 PC card I/F connector (68-pin)........................................................................ C-11
Table C-6 SD card I/F connector (12-pin)........................................................................ C-12
Table C-7 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin) .................................................................... C-13
Table C-8 MDC I/F connector (30-pin) ........................................................................... C-15
Table C-9 Keyboard I/F connector (30-pin)..................................................................... C-16
Table C-10 PAD I/F connector (5-pin)............................................................................... C-16
Appendices
App-vi PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table C-11 Network I/F connector (14-pin)....................................................................... C-17
Table C-12 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)............................................................................ C-17
Table C-13 Bluetooth connector (20-pin)......................................................................... C-18
Table C-14 USB Port 0/1 connector (8-pin) .................................................................... C-18
Table C-15 USB Port 2 connector (4-pin) ....................................................................... C-18
Table C-16 LCD connector (40-pin) ............................................................................... C-19
Table C-17 CRT I/F connector (15-pin) .......................................................................... C-20
Table C-18 TV out connector (4-pin) .............................................................................. C-20
Table C-19 Speaker Connector (4-pin) ........................................................................... C-20
Table C-20 DC-IN Connector (2-pin)............................................................................. C-21
Table C-21 Main battery connector (10-pin).................................................................... C-21
Table C-22 RTC battery connector (3-pin) ...................................................................... C-21
Table C-23 Fan connector (3-pin)................................................................................... C-21
Table C-24 LED board I/F connector (20-pin) ................................................................ C-22
Table C-25 SD board I/F connector (20-pin)................................................................... C-22
Table C-26 System board I/F connector (20-pin)............................................................. C-23
Table C-27 System board I/F connector (20-pin)............................................................. C-24
Table C-28 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin) .......................................................... C-24
Table C-29 External Microphone connector (6-pin) ......................................................... C-24
Table C-30 Headphone connector (6-pin)........................................................................ C-25
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) ........................................................................... D-1
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key.......................................................................... D-5
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode ......................................................................... D-6
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key................................................................................... D-6
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode ............................................................................ D-7
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code.................................................................................... D-7
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code.................................................................................... D-8
Table I-1 MTBF ..............................................................................................................I-1
Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) App-vii
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) A-1
Appendix A P
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Precautions for handling the LCD module
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the following
precautions when handling the LCD module:
1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is properly
aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.
2. For 12.1 inch LCD module, be careful to align the four holes at the right side and left side of
the LCD module with the corresponding holes in the LCD cover before securing the module
with four screws.
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.
Also, the panel’s polarized surface is easily scarred, so be carefully when handling it.
Appendices Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
A-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty, try
breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a CRT cleaning agent. Apply the agent to a cloth
and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.
4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change the
screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) A-3
5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object, which
could cause breakage or cracks.
6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from electrostatic
discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the module.
Appendices Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
A-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long periods.
8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the liquid
crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) A-5
9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.
10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin (amine)
or silicon glue (alcohol or oxime). These materials can release gas that can damage the
panel’s polarization.
Appendices Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
A-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Appendix B Board Layout Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) B-1
Appendix B Board Layout
B.1 System Board (FPYSY*) Front View
Figure B-1 System board (FPYSY*) layout (front)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(K)
(L)
(M)
(N)
(O)
(P)
(Q)
Appendices Appendix B Board Layout
B-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table B-1 System board (FPYSY*) ICs and connectors (front)
Mark Number Name
(A) PJ6003 Speaker connector
(B) PJ3230 Keyboard connector
(C) PJ9550 SD board I/F connector
(D) PJ8770 Fan connector
(E) PJ8760 RTC battery connector
(F) PJ2000 Debugging port
(G) PJ4400 Bluetooth I/F connector
(H) PJ3240 Touch pad connector
(I) PJ1420 Internal memory connector
(J) PJ1440 Extension memory connector
(K) PJ9500 LED board I/F connector
(L) PJ3011 MDC cable connector
(M) IC3200 EC/KBC
(N) IC1200 Montara-GM+
(0) IC1600 ICH4-M
(P) IC3000 FWH
(Q) PJ2130 SD card I/F connector
Appendix B Board Layout Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) B-3
B.2 System Board (FPYSY*) Back View
Figure B-2 System board (FPYSY*) layout (back)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(K)
(L)
(M)
Appendices Appendix B Board Layout
B-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table B-2 System board (FPYSY*) ICs and connectors (back)
Mark Number Name
(A) PJ2110 PC card connector
(B) PJ4100 R45 jack
(C) PJ5640 TV-out connector
(D) PJ5620 CRT connector
(E) PJ4700 USB port 0/1 connector
(F) PJ8800 DC-IN jack
(G) PJ4701 USB port 2 connector
(H) PJ8810 Main battery connector
(I) PJ1800 HDD connector
(J) PJ1801 CD-ROM connector
(K) IC4200 1394 PHY/LINK
(L) IC2000 YEBISUSS
(M) IS1050 CPU socket
Appendix B Board Layout Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) B-5
B.3 SD Board (FPYSD*) View
(Front)
(Back)
Figure B-3 SD board (FPYSD*) layout
Table B-3 SD board (FPYSD*) ICs and connectors
Mark Number Name
(A) PJ9555 System board I/F connector
(B) PJ6000 Internal microphone connector
(C) PJ6001 External microphone jack
(D) PJ6002 Headphone jack
(E) S3260 Wireless LAN kill switch
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D) (E)
Appendices Appendix B Board Layout
B-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
B.4 LED Board (FPYLE*) View
(Front)
(Back)
Figure B-4 LED board (FPYLE*) layout
Table B-4 LED board (FPYLE*) ICs and connectors
Mark Number Name
(A) PJ9505 System board I/F connector
(A)
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-1
C
Appendix C Pin Assignment
System Board
C.1 PJ1420 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)(1/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 MRVREF-B1V - 2 MRVREF-B1V -
3 GND - 4 GND -
5 SDQ05R-B2P I/O 6 SDQ02R-B2P I/O
7 SDQ04R-B2P I/O 8 SDQ03R-B2P I/O
9 2R5-B2V - 10 2R5-B2V -
11 SDQS0R-B2P I/O 12 GND -
13 SDQ00R-B2P I/O 14 SDQ07R-B2P I/O
15 GND - 16 GND -
17 SDQ01R-B2P I/O 18 SDQ06R-B2P I/O
19 SDQ12R-B2P I/O 20 SDQ11R-B2P I/O
21 2R5-B2V - 22 2R5-B2V -
23 SDQ13R-B2P I/O 24 SDQ10R-B2P I/O
25 SDQS1R-B2P I/O 26 SDM01R-B2P I
27 GND - 28 GND -
29 SDQ08R-B2P I/O 30 SDQ15R-B2P I/O
31 SDQ09R-B2P I/O 32 SDQ14R-B2P I/O
33 2R5-B2V I 34 2R5-B2V -
35 SCK0-B2P I 36 2R5-B2V -
37 SCK0-B2N I 38 GND -
39 GND - 40 GND -
41 SDQ20R-B2P I/O 42 SDQ21R-B2P I/O
43 SDQ17R-B2P I/O 44 SDQ18R-B2P I/O
45 2R5-B2V - 46 2R5-B2V -
47 SDQS2R-B2P I/O 48 SDM02R-B2P I
49 SDQ22R-B2P I/O 50 SDQ19R-B2P I/O
51 GND - 52 GND -
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)(2/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
53 SDQ16R-B2P I/O 54 SDQ23R-B2P I/O
55 SDQ25R-B2P I/O 56 SDQ30R-B2P I/O
57 2R5-B2V O 58 2R5-B2V O
59 SDQ24R-B2P I/O 60 SDQ26R-B2P I/O
61 SDQS3R-B2P I/O 62 SDM03R-B2p I/O-
63 GND - 64 GND -
65 SDQ29R-B2P I/O 66 SDQ27R-B2P I/O
67 SDQ28R-B2P I/O 68 SDQ31R-B2P I/O
69 2R5-B2V - 70 2R5-B2V O
71 SCB5A-B2P I/O 72 SCB0A-B2P I/O
73 SCB4A-B2P I/O 74 SCB1A-B2P I/O
75 GND - 76 GND -
77 SDQS8A-B2P I/O 78 GND -
79 SCB2A-B2P I/O 80 SCB3A-B2P I/O
81 2R5-B2V O 82 2R5-B2V -
83 SCB6A-B2P I/O 84 SCB7A-B2P I/O
85 NC - 86 NC -
87 GND - 88 GND -
89 2R5-B2P - 90 GND -
91 GND - 92 2R5-B2V -
93 2R5-B2V - 94 2R5-B2V -
95 SCKE1-B2P I 96 SCKE0-B2P I
97 NC - 98 NC -
99 SMA12-B2P I 100 SMA11-B2P I
101 SMA09-B2P I 102 SMA08-B2P I
103 GND - 104 GND -
105 SMA07-B2P I 106 SMA06-B2P I
107 SMA05-B2P I 108 SMAB04-B2P I
109 SMA03-B2P I 110 SMAB02-B2P I
111 SMA01-B2P I 112 SMA00-B2P I
113 2R5-B2V - 114 2R5-B2V -
115 SMA10-B2P I 116 SBS1R-B2P -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-3
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)(3/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
117 SBS0R-B2P I 118 SRASR-B2N I
119 SWER-B2N I 120 SCASR-B2N I
121 SCS0-B2N I 122 SCS1-B2N I
123 NC - 124 NC -
125 GND - 126 GND -
127 SDQ37R-B2P I/O 128 SDQ34R-B2P I/O
129 SDQ36R-B2P I/O 130 SDQ38R-B2P I/O
131 2R5-B2V - 132 2R5-B2V O
133 SDQS4R-B2P I/O 134 SDM04R-B2P I
135 SDQ32R-B2P I/O 136 SDQ39R-B2P I/O
137 GND - 138 GND -
139 SDQ33R-B2P I/O 140 SDQ35R-B2P I/O
141 SDQ45R-B2P I/O 142 SDQ42R-B2P I/O
143 2R5-B2V - 144 2R5-B2V -
145 SDQ40R-B2P I/O 146 SDQ47R-B2P I/O
147 SDQS5R-B2P I/O 148 GND -
149 GND - 150 GND -
151 SDQ41R-B2P I/O 152 SDQ46R-B2P I/O
153 SDQ44R-B2P I/O 154 SDQ43R-B2P I/O
155 2R5-B2V - 156 2R5-B2V -
157 2R5-B2V - 158 SCK1-B2N I
159 GND - 160 SCK1-B2P I
161 GND - 162 GND -
163 SDQ53R-B2P I/O 164 SDQ55R-B2P I/O
165 SDQ48R-B2P I/O 166 SDQ50R-B2P I/O
167 2R5-B2V O 168 2R5-B2V -
169 SDQS6R-B2P I/O 170 GND -
171 SDQ52R-B2P I/O 172 SDQ54R-B2P I/O
173 GND - 174 GND -
175 SDQ49R-B2P I/O 176 SDQ51R-B2P I/O
177 SDQ60R-B2P I/O 178 SDQ62R-B2P I/O
179 2R5-B2V O 180 2R5-B2V -
181 SDQ56R-B2P I/O 182 SDQ58R-B2P I/O
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)(4/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
183 SDQS7R-B2P I/O 184 GND -
185 GND - 186 GND -
187 SDQ57R-B2P I/O 188 SDQ59R-B2P I/O
189 SDQ51R-B2P I/O 190 SDQ63R-B2P I/O
191 2R5-B2V - 192 2R5-B2V O
193 SMBDAT-P3P I/O 194 P3V O
195 SMBCLK-P3P O 196 GND -
197 P3V - 198 GND -
199 NC - 200 NC -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-5
C.2 PJ1440 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)(1/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 MRVREF-B1V - 2 MRVREF-B1V -
3 GND - 4 GND -
5 SDQ05R-B2P I/O 6 SDQ02R-B2P I/O
7 SDQ04R-B2P I/O 8 SDQ03R-B2P I/O
9 2R5-B2V - 10 2R5-B2V -
11 SDQS0R-B2P I/O 12 GND -
13 SDQ00R-B2P I/O 14 SDQ07R-B2P I/O
15 GND - 16 GND -
17 SDQ01R-B2P I/O 18 SDQ06R-B2P I/O
19 SDQ12R-B2P I/O 20 SDQ11R-B2P I/O
21 2R5-B2V - 22 2R5-B2V -
23 SDQ13R-B2P I/O 24 SDQ10R-B2P I/O
25 SDQS1R-B2P I/O 26 SDM01R-B2P I
27 GND - 28 GND -
29 SDQ08R-B2P I/O 30 SDQ15R-B2P I/O
31 SDQ09R-B2P I/O 32 SDQ14R-B2P I/O
33 2R5-B2V I 34 2R5-B2V -
35 SCK3-B2P I 36 2R5-B2V -
37 SCK3-B2N I 38 GND -
39 GND - 40 GND -
41 SDQ20R-B2P I/O 42 SDQ21R-B2P I/O
43 SDQ17R-B2P I/O 44 SDQ18R-B2P I/O
45 2R5-B2V - 46 2R5-B2V -
47 SDQS2R-B2P I/O 48 SDM02R-B2P I
49 SDQ22R-B2P I/O 50 SDQ19R-B2P I/O
51 GND - 52 GND -
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)(2/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
53 SDQ16R-B2P I/O 54 SDQ23R-B2P I/O
55 SDQ25R-B2P I/O 56 SDQ30R-B2P I/O
57 2R5-B2V O 58 2R5-B2V O
59 SDQ24R-B2P I/O 60 SDQ26R-B2P I/O
61 SDQS3R-B2P I/O 62 SDM03R-B2p I/O-
63 GND - 64 GND -
65 SDQ29R-B2P I/O 66 SDQ27R-B2P I/O
67 SDQ28R-B2P I/O 68 SDQ31R-B2P I/O
69 2R5-B2V - 70 2R5-B2V O
71 SCB5B-B2P I/O 72 SCB0B-B2P I/O
73 SCB4B-B2P I/O 74 SCB1B-B2P I/O
75 GND - 76 GND -
77 SDQS8B-B2P I/O 78 GND -
79 SCB2B-B2P I/O 80 SCB3B-B2P I/O
81 2R5-B2V O 82 2R5-B2V -
83 SCB6B-B2P I/O 84 SCB7B-B2P I/O
85 NC - 86 NC -
87 GND - 88 GND -
89 2R5-B2P - 90 GND -
91 GND - 92 2R5-B2V -
93 2R5-B2V - 94 2R5-B2V -
95 SCKE3-B2P I 96 SCKE2-B2P I
97 NC - 98 NC -
99 SMA12-B2P I 100 SMA11-B2P I
101 SMA09-B2P I 102 SMA08-B2P I
103 GND - 104 GND -
105 SMA07-B2P I 106 SMA06-B2P I
107 SMA05-B2P I 108 SMAB04-B2P I
109 SMA03-B2P I 110 SMAB02-B2P I
111 SMA01-B2P I 112 SMA00-B2P I
113 2R5-B2V - 114 2R5-B2V -
115 SMA10-B2P I 116 SBS1-B2P -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-7
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)(3/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
117 SBS0-B2P I 118 SRAS-B2N I
119 SWE-B2N I 120 SCAS-B2N I
121 SCS2-B2N I 122 SCS3-B2N I
123 NC - 124 NC -
125 GND - 126 GND -
127 SDQ37R-B2P I/O 128 SDQ34R-B2P I/O
129 SDQ36R-B2P I/O 130 SDQ38R-B2P I/O
131 2R5-B2V - 132 2R5-B2V O
133 SDQS4R-B2P I/O 134 SDM04R-B2P I
135 SDQ32R-B2P I/O 136 SDQ39R-B2P I/O
137 GND - 138 GND -
139 SDQ33R-B2P I/O 140 SDQ35R-B2P I/O
141 SDQ45R-B2P I/O 142 SDQ42R-B2P I/O
143 2R5-B2V - 144 2R5-B2V -
145 SDQ40R-B2P I/O 146 SDQ47R-B2P I/O
147 SDQS5R-B2P I/O 148 GND -
149 GND - 150 GND -
151 SDQ41R-B2P I/O 152 SDQ46R-B2P I/O
153 SDQ44R-B2P I/O 154 SDQ43R-B2P I/O
155 2R5-B2V - 156 2R5-B2V -
157 2R5-B2V - 158 SCK4-B2N I
159 GND - 160 SCK5-B2P I
161 GND - 162 GND -
163 SDQ53R-B2P I/O 164 SDQ55R-B2P I/O
165 SDQ48R-B2P I/O 166 SDQ50R-B2P I/O
167 2R5-B2V O 168 2R5-B2V -
169 SDQS6R-B2P I/O 170 GND -
171 SDQ52R-B2P I/O 172 SDQ54R-B2P I/O
173 GND - 174 GND -
175 SDQ49R-B2P I/O 176 SDQ51R-B2P I/O
177 SDQ60R-B2P I/O 178 SDQ62R-B2P I/O
179 2R5-B2V O 180 2R5-B2V -
181 SDQ56R-B2P I/O 182 SDQ58R-B2P I/O
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-8 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)(4/4)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
183 SDQS7R-B2P I/O 184 GND -
185 GND - 186 GND -
187 SDQ57R-B2P I/O 188 SDQ59R-B2P I/O
189 SDQ51R-B2P I/O 190 SDQ63R-B2P I/O
191 2R5-B2V - 192 2R5-B2V O
193 SMBDAT-P3P I/O 194 P3V O
195 SMBCLK-P3P O 196 GND -
197 P3V - 198 GND -
199 NC - 200 NC -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-9
C.3 PJ1800 HDD I/F connector (44-pin)
Table C-3 HDD I/F connector (44-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 IDRSTA-P5N O 2 GND -
3 PDD07-P3P I/O 4 PDD08-P3P I/O
5 PDD06-P3P I/O 6 PDD09-P3P I/O
7 PDD05-P3P I/O 8 PDD10-P3P I/O
9 PDD04-P3P I/O 10 PDD11-P3P I/O
11 PDD03-P3P I/O 12 PDD12-P3P I/O
13 PDD02-P3P I/O 14 PDD13-P3P I/O
15 PDD01-P3P I/O 16 PDD14-P3P I/O
17 PDD00-P3P I/O 18 PDD15-P3P I/O
19 GND - 20 NC -
21 PDDREQ-P3P I 22 GND -
23 PDIOW-P3N O 24 GND -
25 PDIOR-P3N O 26 GND -
27 PIORDY-P3P I 28 GND -
29 PDDACK-P3N O 30 GND -
31 IRQ14-P3P I 32 N.C -
33 PDA1-P3P O 34 N.C -
35 PDA0-P3P O 36 PDA2-P3P O
37 PDCS1-P3N O 38 PDCS3-P3N O
39 HDDLED-P5N O 40 GND -
41 P5V - 42 P5V -
43 GND - 44 NC -
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-10 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
C.4 PJ1801 Optical drive I/F connector (50-pin)
Table C-4 Optical drive I/F connector (50-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 NC - 2 CDAUDR-PEXP O
3 NC - 4 NC -
5 IDRSTB-P5N 6 SDD08-P3P I/O
7 SDD07-P3P I/O 8 SDD09-P3P I/O
9 SDD06-P3P I/O 10 SDD10-P3P I/O
11 SDD05-P3P I/O 12 SDD11-P3P I/O
13 SDD04-P3P I/O 14 SDD12-P3P I/O
15 SDD03-P3P I/O 16 SDD13-P3P I/O
17 SDD02-P3P I/O 18 SDD14-P3P I/O
19 SDD01-P3P I/O 20 SDD15-P3P I/O
21 SDD00-P3P I/O 22 SDDREQ-P3P I
23 GND - 24 SDIOR-P3N O
25 SDIOW-P3N O 26 GND -
27 SIORDY-P3P I 28 SDDACK-P3N O
29 IRQ15-P3P I 30 NC -
31 SDA1-P3P O 32 NC -
33 SDA0-P3P O 34 SDA2-P3P O
35 SDCS1-P3N O 36 SDCS3-P3N O
37 CDRLED-P5N O 38 P5V -
39 P5V - 40 P5V -
41 P5V - 42 P5V -
43 GND - 44 GND -
45 GND - 46 NC -
47 NC - 48 GND -
49 NC - 50 NC -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-11
C.5 PJ2110 PC card I/F connector (68-pin)
Table C-5 PC card I/F connector (68-pin)(1/2)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 GND - 2 ACAD00-EYP I/O
3 ACAD01-EYP I/O 4 ACAD03-EYP I/O
5 ACAD01-EYP I/O 6 ACAD07-EYP I/O
7 ACCBEO-EYP I/O 8 ACAD08-EYP I/O
9 ACAD11-EYP I/O 10 ACAD12-EYP I/O
11 ACAD14-EYP I/O 12 ACCBE1-EYN I/O
13 ACD14-EYP I/O 14 ACRERR-EYN I/O
15 ACRAR-EYP I/O 16 ACINT-EYN I/O
17 MCVCCA I/O 18 MCVRRA I/O
19 ACCLK-EYP I/O 20 ACIRDY-EYN I/O
21 ACCBE2-EYN I/O 22 ACAD18-EYP I/O
23 ACAD20-EYP I/O 24 ACAD21-EYP I/O
25 ACAD22-EYP I/O 26 ACAD23-EYP I/O
27 ACAD24-EYP I/O 28 ACAD25-EYP I/O
29 ACAD25-EYP I/O 30 ACAD27-EYP I/O
31 ACAD29-EYP I/O 32 ACD02-EYP I/O
33 ACCLKR-EYN I/O 34 GND -
35 GND - 36 ACCD1-E3N I/O
37 ACAD02-EYP I/O 38 ACAD04-EYP I/O
39 ACAD06-EYP I/O 40 ACD14-EYP I/O
41 ACAD08-EYP I/O 42 ACAD10-EYP I/O
43 ACVS1-E3P I/O 44 ACAD13-EYP I/O
45 ACAD15-EYP I/O 46 ACAD16-EYP I/O
47 ACA18-EYP I/O 48 ACLOCK-EYN I/O
49 ACSTOP-EYN I/O 50 ACDEVS-EYN I/O
51 MCVCCA I 52 MCVPPA-EYN I/O
53 ACTRDY-EYN I/O 54 ACFRAM-EYN I/O
55 ACAD17-EYP I/O 56 ACAD18-EYP I/O
57 ACYS2-E3P I/O 58 ACRST-EYN I/O
59 ACSERR-EYN I/O 60 ACRE0-EYN I/O
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-12 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table C-5 PC card I/F connector (68-pin)(2/2)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
61 ACCBE3-EYN I/O 62 ACAUDI-EYP I
63 ACSTSC-EYP I 64 ACAD28-EYP I/O
65 ACAD30-EYP I/O 66 ACAD31-EYP I/O
67 ACCD2-E3N I 68 GND -
C.6 PJ2130 SD card I/F connector (12-pin)
Table C-6 SD card I/F connector (12-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 SDAT3-E3P I/O 2 SDCMD-E3P I/O
3 GND - 4 SD-E3V -
5 SDCLK-E3P O 6 GND -
7 SDAT0-E3P I/O 8 SDAT1-E3P I/O
9 SDAT2-E3P I/O 10 SDCD-E3N I
11 SDWP-E3P - 12 GND -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-13
C.7 PJ2200 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin)
Table C-7 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin) (1/2)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 NC - 2 NC -
3 NC - 4 NC -
5 NC - 6 NC -
7 NC - 8 NC -
9 NC - 10 NC -
11 NC - 12 NC -
13 (WLON-S3N) I 14 NC -
15 GND - 16 NC -
17 PIRQD-P3N I 18 P5V -
19 P3V - 20 PIRQG-P3N O
21 NC - 22 NC -
23 GND - 24 E3V -
25 X33MPC-P3P I 26 PCIRSO-P3N O
27 GND - 28 P3V -
29 PREQ2-P3N I 30 PGNT2-P3N O
31 P3V - 32 GND -
33 AD31-P3P I 34 PME-S3N O
35 AD29-P3P I 36 NC -
37 GND - 38 AD30-P3P O
39 AD27-P3P I 40 P3V -
41 AD25-P3P I 42 AD28-P3P O
43 NC - 44 AD26-P3P O
45 CBE3-P3N I 46 AD24-P3P O
47 AD23-P3P I 48 AD26-P3P O
49 GND - 50 GND -
51 AD21-P3P I 52 AD22-P3P O
53 AD19-P3P I 54 AD20-P3P O
55 GND - 56 PAR-P3P O
57 AD17-P3P I 58 AD18-P3P O
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-14 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table C-7 Mini PCI I/F connector (124-pin) (2/2)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
59 CBE2-P3N I 60 AD16-P3P O
61 IRDY-P3N I 62 GND -
63 P3V - 64 FRAME-P3N O
65 CLKRUN-P3N I 66 TRDY-P3N O
67 SERR-P3N I 68 STOP-P3N O
69 GND - 70 P3V -
71 PERR-P3N - 72 DEVSEL-P3N O
73 CBE1-P3N I 74 GND -
75 AD14-P3P I 76 AD15-P3P O
77 GND - 78 AD13-P3P O
79 AD12-P3P I 80 AD11-P3P O
81 AD10-P3P I 82 GND -
83 GND - 84 AD09-P3P O
85 AD08-P3P I 86 CBE0-P3N O
87 AD07-P3P I 88 P3V -
89 P3V - 90 AD06-P3P O
91 AD05-P3P I 92 AD04-P3P O
93 NC - 94 AD02-P3P O
95 AD03-P3P I 96 AD00-P3P O
97 P5V - 98 NC -
99 AD01-P3P I 100 NC -
101 GND - 102 GND -
103 NC - 104 GND -
105 NC - 106 NC -
107 NC - 108 NC -
109 NC - 110 NC -
111 NC - 112 NC -
113 GND - 114 GND -
115 NC - 116 NC -
117 GND - 118 NC -
119 GND - 120 GND -
121 NC - 122 NC -
123 NC - 124 E3V -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-15
C.8 PJ3010 MDC I/F connector (30-pin)
Table C-8 MDC I/F connector (30-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 NC - 2 GND -
3 GND - 4 NC -
5 NC - 6 NC -
7 NC - 8 GND -
9 NC - 10 NC -
11 NC - 12 NC -
13 NC - 14 NC -
15 GND - 16 E3V -
17 E3V - 18 NC -
19 GND - 20 GND -
21 NC - 22 M97SY2-P3P I
23 M97OT2-P3P I 24 NC -
25 M97RS2-S3N I 26 M97IN2-E3P O
27 GND - 28 GND -
29 GND - 30 X97BC2-P3P I/O
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-16 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
C.9 PJ3230 Keyboard I/F connector (30-pin)
Table C-9 Keyboard I/F connector (30-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 NC - 2 NC -
3 CAPLED-P5N O 4 P5V -
5 KBSC00-S3N O 6 KBSC01-S3N O
7 KBSC02-S3N O 8 KBSC03-S3N O
9 KBSC04-S3N O 10 KBSC05-S3N O
11 KBSC06-S3N O 12 KBRT00-S3N I
13 KBSC07-S3N O 14 KBSC08-S3N O
15 KBSC09-S3N O 16 KBRT01-S3N I
17 KBRT02-S3N I 18 KBRT03-S3N I
19 KBSC10-S3N O 20 KBSC11-S3N O
21 KBRT04-S3N I 22 KBRT05-S3N I
23 KBSC12-S3N O 24 KBSC13-S3N O
25 KBRT06-S3N I 26 KBRT07-S3N I
27 KBSC14-S3N O 28 KBSC15-S3N O
29 NC - 30 NC -
C.10 PJ3240 PAD I/F connector (5-pin)
Table C-10 PAD I/F connector (5-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 GND - 2 IPDCLK-P5P I/O
3 IPDDAT-P5P I/O 4 NC -
5 P5V -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-17
C.11 PJ4100 Network I/F connector (14-pin)
Table C-11 Network I/F connector (14-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
A1 (TDP-P3P) O A2 (TDN-P3N) O
A3 (RDP-P3P) O A4 NC -
A5 NC - A6 (RDN-P3N) O
A7 NC - A8 NC -
A9 ACT-P3N I A10 P3V -
A11 LNK-P3N I A12 P3V -
B1 MDMTIP-E3P - B2 MDMRING-E3P -
C.12 PJ4200 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)
Table C-12 1394 I/F connector (4-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 TPBO-P3N I/O 2 TPBO-P3P I/O
3 TPAO-P3N I/O 4 TPAO-P3P I/O
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-18 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
C.13 PJ4400 Bluetooth connector (20-pin)
Table C-13 Bluetooth connector (20-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 BT-P3V - 2 NC -
3 NC - 4 USBPP4-S3N I/O
5 USBP4-S3P I/O 6 NC -
7 NC - 8 (BTIFOF-S3N) I
9 NC - 10 GND -
11 NC - 12 PMEBT-S3N O
13 BTRST-S3P I 14 NC -
15 NC - 16 NC -
17 NC - 18 BTMDL-P3N O
19 NC - 20 GND -
C.14 PJ4700 USB Port 0/1 connector (8-pin)
Table C-14 USB Port 0/1 connector (8-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 USBPOV-E5V I 2 USBP0-S3N I/O
3 USBP0-S3P I/O 4 GND -
5 USBPOV-E5V I 6 USBP1-S3N I/O
7 USBP1-S3P I/O 8 GND -
C.15 PJ4701 USB Port 2 connector (4-pin)
Table C-15 USB Port 2 connector (4-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 USBP1V-E5V I 2 USBP2-S3N I/O
3 USBP2-S3P I/O 4 GND -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-19
C.16 PJ5600 LCD connector (40-pin)
Table C-16 LCD connector (40-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 BRT2DA-S3P O 2 BRT1-P5P O
3 BRT0-P5P O 4 FL-P5V -
5 FL-P5V - 6 FL-P5V -
7 NC - 8 GND -
9 GND - 10 GND -
11 NC - 12 NC -
13 PNL-P3V - 14 PNL-P3V -
15 PNL-P3V - 16 GND -
17 GND - 18 NC -
19 NC - 20 NC -
21 NC - 22 GND -
23 GND - 24 GND -
25 GND - 26 TXCLKA-PYP O
27 TXCLKA-PYP O 28 GND -
29 TXDTA2-PYP O 30 TXDTA2-PYN O
31 GND - 32 TXDTAI-PYP O
33 TXDTA1-PYN O 34 GND -
35 TXDAD-PYP O 36 TXDTAD-PYN O
37 GND - 38 GND -
39 GND - 40 GND -
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-20 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
C.17 PJ5620 CRT I/F connector (15-pin)
Table C-17 CRT I/F connector (15-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 RED-PXP O 2 GREEN-PXP O
3 BLUE-PXP O 4 NC -
5 GND - 6 GND -
7 GND - 8 GND -
9 DDC-P5V - 10 GND -
11 NC - 12 (DDCADA-P3P) O
13 (HSYNC-P3P) O 14 (VSYNC-P3P) O
15 (DDCACK-P3P) O
C.18 PJ5640 TV out connector (4-pin)
Table C-18 TV out connector (4-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 GND - 2 GND -
3 LUMINA-PYP O 4 CHROMA-PYP O
C.19 PJ6003 Speaker Connector (4-pin)
Table C- 19 Speaker Connector (4-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 SPOTL-PXP O 2 SPOTL-PXN O
3 SPOTR-PXP O 4 SPOTR-PXN O
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-21
C.20 PJ8800 DC-IN Connector (2-pin)
Table C- 20 DC-IN Connector (2-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 ADPDC O 2 GND -
C.21 PJ8810 Main battery connector (10-pin)
Table C- 21 Main battery connector (10-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 (+) - 2 BTMP1 O
3 DCHG - 4 (M5V) -
5 PSCL-S5P I 6 PSDA-S5P I
7 GND - 8 DBT10V-S5N O
9 GND - 10 GND -
C.22 PJ8760 RTC battery connector (3-pin)
Table C- 22 RTC battery connector (3-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 R3V - 2 NC -
3 GND -
C.23 PJ8770 Fan connector (3-pin)
Table C- 23 Fan connector (3-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 FAN VCC - 2 GND -
3 FANG-P3P I
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-22 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
C.24 PJ9500 LED board I/F connector (20-pin)
Table C- 24 LED board I/F connector (20-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 P5V - 2 NC -
3 GND - 4 (BTLED-S5N) O
5 GND - 6 (ARWLED-P5N) O
7 (NUMLED-P5N) O 8 P5V -
9 CDRLED-P5N O 10 HDDLED-P5N O
11 GND - 12 BAT1GR-S5N O
13 BAT1OR-S5N O 14 M5V -
15 (PWLEGR-S5N) O 16 (PWLEOR-S5N) O
17 GND - 18 DCINGR-S5N O
19 DCINOR-S5N O 20 M5V -
C.25 PJ9550 SD board I/F connector (20-pin)
Table C- 25 SD board I/F connector (20-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 HEADR-PXP O 2 HEADL-PXP O
3 MICBIS-P2V O 4 SPKDIS-P4N I
5 A-GND - 6 A-GND -
7 MICSIG-PXP I 8 A-GND -
9 LOUTL-PXP O 10 LOUTR-PXP O
11 AGCL-PXP I 12 AGCR-PXP I
13 VOLREF-P2V O 14 NC -
15 NC - 16 GND -
17 NC - 18 BTSWON-S3P I
19 NC - 20 S3V -
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-23
LED Board
C.26 PJ9505 System board I/F connector (20-pin)
Table C- 26 System board I/F connector (20-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 P5V - 2 NC -
3 GND - 4 (BTLE2-S5N) I
5 GND - 6 (ARWLE2-P5N) I
7 (NUMLE2-P5N) I 8 P5V -
9 CDRLE2-P5N I 10 HDDLE2-P5N I
11 GND - 12 BAT1G2-S5N I
13 BAT1O2-S5N I 14 M5V -
15 PWLEG2-S3N I 16 (PWLEOR-S5N) I
17 GND - 18 DCING2-S5N I
19 DCINO2-S5N I 20 M5V -
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-24 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
SD Board
C.27 PJ9555 System board I/F connector (20-pin)
Table C- 27 System board I/F connector (20-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal Name I/O
1 HEADR-PXP I 2 HEADL-PXP I
3 MICBIS-P2V I 4 SPKDIS-PXP O
5 GND - 6 GND -
7 MICSIG-PXP I 8 GND -
9 LOUTL-PXP I 10 LOUTR-PXP O
11 AGCL-PXP O 12 AGCR-PXP I
13 VOLREF-P2V O 14 NC -
15 NC - 16 GND -
17 NC - 18 BTSWON-S3P I
19 NC - 20 S3V -
C.28 PJ6000 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin)
Table C- 28 Internal Microphone connector (2-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 Int.mic - 2 A-GND -
C.29 PJ6001 External Microphone connector (6-pin)
Table C- 29 External Microphone connector (6-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 A-GND - 2 MIKIN-PXP I
3 Ext.mic O 4 N.C. -
5 N.C. - 6 INTMIC I
Appendix C Pin Assignment Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) C-25
C.30 PJ6002 Headphone connector (6-pin)
Table C- 30 Headphone connector (6-pin)
Pin No. Signal name I/O Pin No. Signal name I/O
1 GND - 2 HEADL-PXP O
3 HEADR-PXP O 4 A-GND -
5 HPIN-P3P I 6 NC -
Appendices Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-26 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) D-1
Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No. Keytop Make Break Make Break Note
01 ‘ ~ 29 A9 0E F0 0E
02 1 ! 02 82 16 F0 16
03 2 @ 03 83 1E F0 1E
04 3 # 04 84 26 F0 26
05 4 $ 05 85 25 F0 25
06 5 % 06 86 2E F0 2E
07 6 ^ 07 87 36 F0 36
08 7 & 08 88 3D F0 3D *2
09 8 * 09 89 3E F0 3E *2
10 9 ( 0A 8A 46 F0 46 *2
11 0 ) 0B 8B 45 F0 45 *2
12 - _ 0C 8C 4E F0 4E
13 = + 0D 8D 55 F0 55
15 BkSp 0E 8E 66 F0 66
16 Tab 0F 8F 0D F0 0D
17 Q 10 90 15 F0 15
18 W 11 91 1D F0 1D
19 E 12 92 24 F0 24
20 R 13 93 2D F0 2D
21 T 14 94 2C F0 2C
22 Y 15 95 35 F0 35
23 U 16 96 3C F0 3C *2
24 I 17 97 43 F0 43 *2
25 O 18 98 44 F0 44 *2
26 P 19 99 4D F0 4D *2
27 [ { 1A 9A 54 F0 54
28 ] } 1B 9B 5B F0 5B
Appendices Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
D-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No. Keytop Make Break Make Break Note
29 \ | 2B AB 5D F0 5D *5
30 Caps Lock 3A BA 58 F0 58
31 A 1E 9E 1C F0 1C
32 S 1F 9F 1B F0 1B
33 D 20 A0 23 F0 23
34 F 21 A1 2B F0 2B
35 G 22 A2 34 F0 34
36 H 23 A3 33 F0 33
37 J 24 A4 3B F0 3B *2
38 K 25 A5 42 F0 42 *2
39 L 26 A6 4B F0 4B *2
40 ; : 27 A7 4C F0 4C *2
41 ‘ “ 28 A8 52 F0 52
43 Enter 1C 9C 5A F0 5A *3
44 Shift (L) 2A AA 12 F0 12
45 No.102
key 56 D6 61 F0 61
46 Z 2C AC 1A F0 1A
47 X 2D AD 22 F0 22
48 C 2E AE 21 F0 21
49 V 2F AF 2A F0 2A
50 B 30 B0 32 F0 32
51 N 31 B1 31 F0 31
52 M 32 B2 3A F0 3A *2
53 , < 33 B3 41 F0 41 *2
54 . > 34 B4 49 F0 49 *2
55 / ? 35 B5 4A F0 4A *2
57 Shift (R) 36 B6 59 F0 59
Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) D-3
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No. Keytop Make Break Make Break Note
58 Ctrl 1D 9D 14 F0 14 *3
60 Alt (L) 38 B8 11 F0 11 *3
61 Space 39 B9 29 F0 29
62 ALT (R) E0 38 E0 B8 E0 11 E0 F0 11
75 Ins E0 52 E0 D2 E0 70 E0 F0 70 *1
76 Del E0 53 E0 D3 E0 71 E0 F0 71 *1
79 ? ? E0 4B E0 CB E0 6B E0 F0 6B *1
80 Home E0 47 E0 C7 E0 6C E0 F0 6C *1
81 End E0 4F E0 CF E0 69 E0 F0 69 *1
83 ?? E0 48 E0 C8 E0 75 E0 F0 75 *1
84 ?? E0 50 E0 D0 E0 72 E0 F0 72 *1
85 PgUp E0 49 E0 C9 E0 7D E0 F0 7D *1
86 PgDn E0 51 E0 D1 E0 7A E0 F0 7A *1
?
89 ? ? E0 4D E0 CD E0 74 E0 F0 74 *1
110 Esc 01
81
76
F0 76
112 F1 3B BB 05 F0 05
113 F2 3C BC 06 F0 06
114 F3 3D BD 04 F0 04
115 F4 3E BE 0C F0 0C
116 F5 3F BF 03 F0 03
117 F6 40 C0 0B F0 0B
118 F7 41 C1 83 F0 83
119 F8 42 C2 0A F0 0A
120 F9 43 C3 01 F0 01
121 F10 44 C4 09 F0 09 *3
Appendices Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
D-4 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No. Keytop Make Break Make Break Note
122 F11 57 D7 78 F0 78 *3
123 F12 58 D8 07 F0 07 *3
124 PrintSc *6 *6 *6 *6 *6
126 Pause *7 *7 *7 *7 *7
202 Fn — — — — *4
203 Win E0 5B E0 DB E0 1F
E0 F0 1F
204 App E0 5D E0 DD E0 2F
E0 F0 2F
Notes:
*1 Scan codes differ by mode.
*2 Scan codes differ by overlay function.
*3 Combination with the Fn key makes different codes.
*4 Fn key does not generate a code by itself.
*5 This key corresponds to key No. 42 in a 102-key model.
*6 Refer to Table D-6, No. 124 key scan code.
*7 Refer to Table D-7, No. 126 key scan code.
Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) D-5
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No.
Key
top Make Break Make Break
55 / E0 AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 4A E0 F0 4A E0 12
75 INS E0 AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 12
76 DEL E0 AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 12
79 ? ? E0 AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 12
80 Home E0 AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12
81 End E0 AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 12
83 ? ? E0 AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 12
84 ? ? E0 AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 12
85 PgUp E0 AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12
86 PgDn E0 AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 12
89 ? ? E0 AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 12
203 Win E0 AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 12
204 App E0 AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 12
Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key. In combination with the
right Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:
With left Shift With right Shift
Set 1 E0 AA ___________E0 B6
E0 2A ____________E0 36
Set 2 E0 F0 12 _________E0 F0 59
E0 12 ____________E0 59
Appendices Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
D-6 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No.
Key
top Make Break Make Break
75 INS E0 2A E0 52 E0 D2 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12
76 DEL E0 2A E0 53 E0 D3 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12
79 ? ? E0 2A E0 4B E0 CB E0 AA
E0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12
80 Home E0 2A E0 47 E0 C7 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12
81 End E0 2A E0 4F E0 CF E0 AA
E0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12
83 ? ? E0 2A E0 48 E0 C8 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12
84 ? ? E0 2A E0 50 E0 D0 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12
85 PgUp E0 2A E0 49 E0 C9 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12
86 PgDn E0 2A E0 51 E0 D1 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12
89 ? ? E0 2A E0 4D E0 CD E0 AA
E0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12
203 Win E0 2A E0 5B E0 DB E0 AA
E0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12
204 App E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA
E0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No. Keytop Make Break Make Break
43 ENT E0 1C E0 9C E0 5A E0 F0 5A
58 CTRL E0 1D E0 9D E0 14 E0 F0 14
60 LALT E0 38 E0 B8 E0 11 E0 F0 11
121 ARROW 45
C5
77 F0
77
122 NUMERIC 45
C5
77 F0
77
123 Scrl 46
C5
7E F0
7E
Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) D-7
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode
Code set 1 Code set 2 Cap
No. Keytop Make Break Make Break
08 7 (7) 47 C7 6C F0 6C
09 8 (8) 48 C8 75 F0 75
10 9 (9) 49 C9 7D F0 7D
11 0 (*) 37 B7 7C F0 7C
23 U (4) 4B CB 6B F0 6B
24 I (5) 4C CC 73 F0 73
25 O (6) 4D CD 74 F0 74
26 P (–) 4A CA 7B F0 7B
37 J (1) 4F CF 69 F0 69
38 K (2) 50 D0 72 F0 72
39 L (3) 51 D1 7A F0 7A
40 ; (+) 4E CE 79 F0 79
52 M (0) 52 D2 70 F0 70
54 . (.) 53 D3 71 F0 71
55 / (/) E0 35 E0 B5 40 4A E0 F0 4A
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code
Code set 1 Code set 2
Key
top Shift Make Break Make Break
Prt Sc Common E0 2A E0 37 E0 B7 E0 AA
E0 12 E0 7C E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12
Ctrl ? E0 37 E0 B7 E0 7C E0 F0 7C
Shift ? E0 37 E0 B7 E0 7C E0 F0 7C
Alt ? 54 D4 84 F0 B4
Appendices Apx. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
D-8 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code
Code set 1 Code set 2 Key
top Shift Make Make
Pause Common*
E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5 E1 14 77 E1 F0 14 F0 77
Ctrl* E0 46 E0 C6 E0 7E E0 F0 7E
*: This key generates only make codes.
Appendix E Key Layout Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) E-1
Appendix E
Appendix E Key Layout
Figure E-1 key layout (US)
Figure E-2 key layout (UK)
Appendices Appendix E Key Layout
E-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) F-1
Appendix F
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams
F.1 LAN Loopback Connector
Figure F-1 LAN loopback Connector
Appendices Appendix F Wiring Diagrams
F-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) G-1
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the system
BIOS.
Tools
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:
? BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer that has renewed BIOS data.
Rewriting the BIOS
Note: 1. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the BIOS.
2. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the BIOS.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
3. If you fail to rewrite BIOS, then when you next turn on the power, a message
may be displayed that the contents of the BIOS have been damaged. In this
case, insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk and the BIOS will be rewritten.
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC card.
4. Connect a USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into either the USB
FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the key (US) or key (UK).
The BIOS rewriting starts.
6. When the process is completed, eject the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk and the system is
automatically reset.
Appendices Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures
G-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) H-1
Appendix H
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the EC/KBC system program when you update the
EC/KBC system.
Tools
To rewrite the EC/KBC, you need the following tool:
? BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer
Rewriting the EC/KBC
Note: 1. Rewrite the EC/KBC only when instructed by a diagnostic disk release
notice.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the EC/KBC.
3. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the EC/KBC.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
4. If you fail to rewrite EC/KBC, then when you next turn on the power, a
message may be displayed that the contents of the EC/KBC have been
erased. In this case, insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk, and the
EC/KBC will be rewritten.
5. Normally it takes about 30 seconds to rewrite the EC/KBC. It may take 3
minutes (maximum), depending on the conditions of the computer or ICs.
The computer is not hung up. Allow sufficient time. Never reboot or turn off
the power to the computer before the rewriting is completed.
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC Card.
4. Connect a USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the Tab key. (Keep holding down the key until a
message appears on the screen.) The BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting starts.
6. When the EC/KBC rewrite is completed, the system is automatically turned off.
Appendices Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures
H-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Appendix I Reliability Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) I-1
Appendix I
Appendix I Reliability
The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures).
Table I-1 MTBF
MTBF Time (hours)
System (Maximum configuration) 6,084
Appendices Appendix I Reliability
I-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)
Apx. J Key FD Appendices
PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499) J-1
Apx. J Reliability
Appendix J Key FD
This Appendix explains how to make a key FD.
1. Start the setup program.
2. Set the cursor to “Not Registered” in “PASSWORD” and press Space or BackSpace key.
The screen to input the password appears.
If the password has been set, “Registered” is displayed in “PASSWORD”. Then cancel the
password first and set a new one.
3. Enter a password.
The number of words shall be within ten. The character "*" is displayed as you enter a
word.
4. Press Enter key.
The first password is recognized and the second one is required.
5. Enter the second password.
Enter the same password as the first one. The character "*" is displayed as you enter a
word.
6. Press Enter key.
The password is registered. When the second password differs from the first one, the
input of the password is required again. Then enter the password same as the first one.
7. When the password is set, press Fn + ? keys. Then the following message appears.
Are you sure ? (Y/N)
The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.
Insert password service disk if necessary.
8. Insert a FD into the USB FDD and press Y key. Then the following message appears.
Password Service Disk Type ? (1:2HD,2:2DD)
When the set FD is 2HD, press 1 key. For 2DD, press 2 key.
The data is written to the FD. (If no FD is set, this procedure is finished.)
When the wiring to the FD is completed, the following message appears.
Remove the password service disk, then press any key.
Remove the FD and finish the procedure by pressing any key.
Appendices Apx. J Key FD
J-2 PORTEGE A200 Maintenance Manual (960-499)

Navigation menu